Skip to main content

Full text of "Upanishads and Sri Sankara's commentary"

See other formats


rO) 

"CO 


THE 


^!2  W^  VPANISHADS 


(I,   l^cna  &  iJluu&alifl< 


FIRST  VOLUME. 


■-^>— 


SESHACHAKtii,  tJ.A.,   b.L,  M.R  A.S. 


^^^^^P 

m 

IVIAORAS 

BL 

3.  A.  NA: 

1124 

.54 

k 

1905. 

E5 

1905 

^^H 

v.l 

^^^^B 

c.l 

^^^^H 

ROBARTS 

^^^^H 

^ 


THB 

UPANISHADS 

AND 

SRI    SANKARAS   COMMENTARY 

TRANSLATED  BY 
S.  SITARAMA  SASTRI.  B.  A 


PUBLISHED  BY 


V.  C.  SESHACHARRI,  B.  A.,  B.   L., 

Vakil,   lliyh   ('(nirt,  Madron. 


FIRST  VOLUME. 
{He- Print:. 


^'\aaii>«is  : 
G.  A.  KATESAN  &  CO  .  PRINTERS  &  PUBLISHERS.  ESPLANADE- 

I  oo». 


PREFACE. 


The  increasino-  interest  evinced  by  the  thinking 
world  in  the  Pliilo.soj)hy  and  Religion  of  the  Hindus 
has  led  nie  to  undertake  the  publication  of  the  transla- 
tion of  the  principal  Upanishads. 

The  special  feature  of  this  jtublication  is  the  trans- 
lation of  the  coniinentary  of  Sri  Sankaracharya,  the- 
oreatest  exponent  of  the  Advaita  system  of  philosoi)hy. 

The  work  has  been  undertaken  chiefly  with  a  view 
to  bring  within  easy  reach  of  .  the  ?]nglish-reading 
})ublic  the  j)riceless  teachings  of  the  l'])anishads,  in 
the  light  of  the  interpretation  of  Sri   Sankaracharya. 

The  spirit  of  the  text  and  of  the  interjn-etation  has, 
throughout  been  faithfully  adhered  to  and,  perhaps,  in 
some  instances,  even  to  the  detriment  of  elegance  in 
diction. 

If  the  earnest  student  finds  any  the  least  help  from 
this  work,  the  publication  will  be  ami)ly  justified. 

My  hearty  thanks  are  due  to  ^Ir.  V.  Swaminatha 
Iyer,  District  Munsiff,  for  the  care  with  which  he  went 
through  the  translation  and  for  his  many  valuable 
suggestions. 

Madras,  i      V.  C.  SESHACHARRI, 

ApHl  1905.  J  Publisher. 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2009  with  funding  from 

Ontario  Council  of  University  Libraries 


http://www.archive.org/details/upanishadssrisanOOsita 


3eaDaeijoponiellrti^« 


Sri  Sankaras  Introduction. 


OM    TAT    SAT. 


Adoration  to  tht^  Brdhitmn.  The  laardras  beginning 
with  I8nv<i8y<iiiii,  etc.,  have  not  been  utilized  in  ritnals, 
because  they  serve  the  puriK).se  of  enlightening  us  on 
the  true  nature  of  the  Atman  who  is  not  an  (uu/d  of 
i.  e.,  not  connected  with.  Karma.  Tlie  true  nature  of 
the  Atrtian  consists,  as  will  be  described,  in  its  jiurity 
being  untouched  by  sin,  oneness,  being  eternal,  having 
no  body,  oiiini|aesence,  etc.,  and  as  that  conflicts  with 
Kdrma,  it  is  only  reasonable  that  these  mantni8  should 
not  be  utilized  in  rituals  ;  nor  is  the  true  nature  of 
the  Atnian  thus  deiined,  a  }>roduct,  a  nxxlification,  a 
thing  to  be  attained  or  a  thing  to  be  refined  ;  nor  iss 
it  of  the  nature  of  a  doer  or  enjoyer  so  that  it  njay  be 
connected  with  Karma.  All  the  I'panishads  exhaust 
themselves  in  describing  the  true  nature  of  the  AtTTUin; 
and  the  Gita  and  the  Mokshadfuo'rua  aie  bent  on  the 


2  ISAVASYOPANISHAD. 

same  end.  Therefore  all  Karma  has  been  enjoined 
in  accordance  with  worldly  understanding,  which  at- 
tributes to  the  Atmati  diversitj-,  agency,  enjoyment, 
impurity,  sinfulness,  etc.  Those  that  know  who  are 
comi)etent  to  jjerform  Karrtia  and  who  are  not, 
(Adhikaravidah)  tell  us  that  he  who  seeks  the  fruits  of 
Kai^Tna — visible  such  as  the  inherent  splendour  of  a 
Brahmin  and  invisilile  such  as  Heaven, etc., — and  thinks 
'*  I  am  a  twice-liorn  free  from  any  defect  such  as  being 
one-eyed  or  hunch-backed,  *fec.,  which  disqualifies  one 
for  the  [)erformance  of  Karnia^^  is  entitled  to  })er- 
form  Karma.  So,  these  mantras  by  enlightening  (us) 
on  the  true  nature  of  the  Atman  remove  our  natural 
ignorance  and  produce  in  us  the  knowledge  of  the  one- 
ness, etc.,  of  the  Atman, — the  means  of  u})rooting 
grief,  delusion,  etc.,  the  concomitants  of  Sfmisara, 
We  shall-  now  briefly  conniient  upon  the  mantras,  the 
persons  competent  to  study  which,  the  subject  matter 
of  wliicli,  the  relevancy  of  which  (sainbandha)  and  the 
fruits  of  which,  have  been  thus  declared. 

The  whole  {lir<ihutaii)  is  all   that   is  invisible.      The 
whole   (Brahmiin)    is   all  that  is   visible.     The  whole 


WITH  SRI  sankara'.s  commextaky.  3 

(Hiranyagarbha)  was  born  out  of  the  \s\io\t'  (Brdhitian). 
When  the  whole  (the  Universe)  is  absorbed  into  tlie 
wliole  (Brahman)  the  whole  alone  (Brahnuin)  reniaina. 
Oiii.      Peace:   Peace!:    Peace!:: 

cT^T  3T%5T  ^f  r^T  ITT  ^^J:  ^^  f^^^H  II  '1  II 

All  tliis — whatsoever  luoveth  on  the  earth — slionld 
he  covered  by  the  Lord.  That  renounced,  enjoy, 
(^ovet  not  anybody's  wealth.  (1). 

Com. — Tlie  word  "ha'  is  from  the  verli  "Ishte' 
(rules)  and  means  '  by  the  Lord.'  The  l/ml  is  Para- 
7ne8vara,  thi"  Paramatman  of  all.  He  rules  eveiything 
beinu;  the  Atniait  of  all.  Should  be  covered  by  the 
Lord,  by  his  own  self,  the  Atmau.  What  ?  All  this, 
whatsoever  moveth  on  the  eai-th.  All  this  universe, 
movable  and  immovalde,  unreal  in  absolute  truth, 
should  be  covered  In'  his  self,  the  Lord,  P<(ramatman, 
with  the  idea,  "  [  alone  am  all  this  as  bein*;  the 
inner  self  of  all.  "  Just  as  the  bad  cnlour — the  result 
of  moisture,  etc., — jaoducetl  by  contact  with  water,  in 
sandal  and  ag(tru,etc.,  is  hidden  (lost)  in  their  natiually 
agreeable  smell  pnxluced  by  the  }»rocess  of  rubbin*;, 
similarly  all  this  on  this  earth  (the  word  e^rrth  liein<j  il- 
lustratively used  for  the  whole  Cosmos)  differentiated 


4  ISAVASYOPANISHAO. 

as  name,  forin,  and  action,  this  bundle  of  modifications, 
superimijosed  ni)on  the  Atrtuin  by  ignorance,  and  con- 
sistintj  in  this  seemin<;'  duality  witli  its  distinctions  of 
doer,  enjoyer,  etc.,  will  be  abandoned  by  the  contem- 
plation of  the  true  Atman.  One  who  thus  contemplates 
on  the  self  as  the  ParanifUmffn  is  bound  to  renounce  the 
three-fold  desire  of  son,  etc.,  and  not  ])erform  Karma. 
'  Tena  tyaldeiuC  means  '  by  such  leiumciation.'  It  is 
well-known  that  one's  son  or  servant,  abandoned 
or  dead,  havino-  tiierefore  no  bond  of  connect i(m, 
does  not  i)rotect  that  one.  '  Kenunciation',  therefore, 
is  the  meanino  of  this  word  tyakte)ia.  Bhitnjithah 
means  piloted.  Having  thus  renounced  all  desires,  do 
not  cherish  any  desire  for  wealth.  ' Anybody^ stvealtJt  ; 
do  not  lon<i;  for  wealth  either  yours  or  another's.  Svit 
is  a  meaningless  ])article. 

Or,  it  may  be  thus  interpreted.  Do  not  covet.  Why  ? 
*  Whose  is  w<^alth  ?  '  is  used  in  the  sense  of  an  objec- 
tion ;  for  nobody  has  any  wealth  which  could  be  coveted. 
The  meaning  is  "all  this  has  been  reuouiiced  l)y  the 
contemplation  of  Jsvara,  that  the  Atman.  is  all.  All 
this,  therefore,  belongs  to  the  Atriian  and  the  Attnati, 
is  all.     Do  not,  therefore,  covet  what  is  unreal." 


WITH  SHI  SANKAKA's   COMMENTARY.  5 

Should  one  wish  to  live  a  hundred  years  on  this 
earth,  he  should  live  doin«^  Kdrtita.  While  thus,  (as) 
man,  you  live,  there  is  no  way  other  than  this  by 
which  Karma  will  not  t'lin«>;  to  you.  (2). 

Ooiu. — Thus  the  drift  of  the  Vedio  text  is 
that  he  who  knows  the  Atniaii  should  renounce  the 
three-fold  desire  of  son,  etc.,  and  save  his  Atman  by 
hein^  centred  in  the  knowledge  of  the  ^4 <//t<f7i((r ii/t>i/fc- 
nishtha).  The  inAiutras  now  pnx'eed  to  inculcate  the 
folU)win^'  for  the  benefit  of  him  who  does  not  know  the 
Atman  and  is  not  com))etent  to  co»>;ni/e  the  Atnui n  as 
above  indicated. 

Kurvaniieva  means  certainly  doinjif,  i.e.,  '  only  by 
<loin<;.'  KariiKdii  uu^iius  '  Af/uihotara,  i^tej*  Jijivishet 
means  '  should  like  to  live.'  Satariisamah  means  *  a 
hundred  years,'  It  has  been  declared  that  that  is  a 
man's  lony;est  life.  Thus  declarin<;  a<;reeably  to 
natural  inclination  the  desire  to  li\e  a  hundred  yeais, 
the  text  lays  down  the  injunction  in  respect  of  how 
one  shoidd  live — ccmtinually  ])erformin<;  Karriia  and 
not  otherwise.  If  you  would  thus  live,  content  to  be 
31  man,  there  is  no  other  mo<le  of  life  than    the   one   of 


6  ISAVASYOPANISHAI). 

[>erfornimw  Agnihotra,  etc.,  by  whicli  bad  Karma  may 
not  c'linij  to  yon.  Therefore,  one  should  like  to  live 
doino;  Karma  enjoined  by  the  Sastras  such  as  Agni- 
hotra, etc.  But  how  is  this  drift  arrived  at  ?  By  the 
prexious  mantra,  Gnananishtha,  has hi'i'n  incwlc-Aied  to 
the  sanyasin.  By  this.  Karnutnistha  is  enjoined  on 
those  wlio  are  not  able  to  beconfe  sanyasins.  Do  you 
not  remember  it  was  pointed  out  that  tlie  antithesis 
between  Knowledge  and  Karma  is  n  fact  unsliakable 
like  a  mountain  ?  Here  also  it  has  l>een  said  that  he 
who  would  like  tolive  must  i)erform  Karma  and  that  this 
universe  must  be  abandoned  as  unreal,  in  the  contem- 
])lation  of  the  Jjord  as  all,  by  one  who  would  protect 
his  Atman  havino-  renounced  all  and  not  coveting  any- 
liodys  wealth.  Accordinp;  to  the  Srutia  it  is  settled  that 
one  should  not  lon^  for  either  life  or  deatli  and  should 
leave  for  tlie  forest.  There  is  also  the  injunction  by 
which  one  is  interdicted  from  returnin*"'  thence — thus 
ordainin*^  sanyasa.  The  distinction  in  the  results  of  the 
two  courses  will  also  be  pointed  out.  (The  Xarayana 
Ui)anishad)  wiys  "  In  the  beoinnin«>"  these  two 
roads  were  laid.  The  road  throuyli  K<irma  and  sa)iy((S(i ; 
the  latter  consists  in  the  renunciati(m  of  the  thn'c- 
fold  desire.     Of  these,  the  road  through  sanyasa  is  the 


WITH  SKI  sankaka's*commentaky.  7 

preferable  one."     The  Tdittiriya  Upanishad  also   says, 
"  Kenunciation  (Xyasd)  certainly  is  to  be  preferred." 

Bhugavan  Vyasd,  the  pi-eceptor  of  the  Vedas,  after 
much  discussion  told  his  son  his  firm  conviction  in  the 
following-  text.  "  These  then  are  the  two  roads  on  which 
the  Vedas  are  based.  Both  the  courses — one  which 
leads  to  Karma  and  the  other  which  draws  away  from 
Kariua  have  been  explained,  etc."  This  division  will 
be  explained. 

<\j  ^^  SRTmiF^sr^fT  %  %  ^]^^%^J  jttt:  ii  x  •• 

Those  births  })artake  of  the  nature  of  the  Aaaras 
and  are  enveloped  in  blind  darkness.  After  leavincj 
the  body  they  who  kill  their  Atman  attain  them.   (3). 

Com. — This  mantra  is  Ix^^un  for  the  j)uri)Ose 
of  condemninj^  those  who  have  no  knowledufe  of  the 
Atnmn.  Asuryah:  even  Devas,  etc.,  are  ^.suras, relative- 
ly to  becomint>'  one  with  Wn^  P<iraiinttman.  Asuryah 
because  they  beloni^  to  them  {Aauras).  Xanut  is  a 
meanini^less  word.  Those  lokaa  (bii-ths)  so  called  be- 
cause the  fruits  of  Karma  are  there  |)erceived  or  en- 
joyed (lokyante).  Andhena  tamasa,  '  i^orance  which 
consists  in  inability  to  see  one's  self.'  Avintah  means 
covered.    These  births  down  to  the  immovable.    Pretya 


8  ISAVASYOPANISHAD. 

means  Meavinji-  the  body.'  '  Abhigachhmdi'  means 
'  attain  in  accordance  w  ith  their  Karma  and  Know- 
ledge.' ^  A tmahanah^  inenna '' tlxoi^e  who  kill  the  ^4/- 
TtKin.^  Who  are  they?  Those  who  do  not  know  the 
Attnaii.  How  do  they  kill  the  eternal  A tmaii't  By 
drawintr  the  veil  of  ignorance  over  the  Atman  that 
exists.  Those  who  do  not,  under  the  influence  of  their 
natural  tendencies  (PrakHti),  know  the  Atnuin  are 
called  ^  Atmahanah'  (slayers  of  the  Atmau)  ;  because 
in  their  case  the  result  of  the  existence  of  the  Atnian, 
i.  e..  the  knowledge  of  its  undecayino  and  immortal 
natme  is  veiled,  as  if  the  Atman  were  killed.  By  this 
fault  of  slayino;  the  Atman,  they  oet  into  S<(7nsara. 

w^i^  iHHT  3TW  %^5^  '?rr^5^^t»r^ri-  i 

rTi?T^cfTS7?TT^^TcT  fcT^r^f^iTW  RTcTfT^I  ^^TTrf  II  ^  II 

It  is  motionless,  one,  faster  than  mind  ;  and  the 
Devas  (the  senses)  could  not  overtake  it  which  ran  be- 
fore. Sittino;,  it  <;oes  faster  than  those  who  nm  after 
it.  By  it,  the  all-pervadino-  air  (Sutratnum)  supi^rts 
the  activity  of  all  living  bein«'s.  (4) 

Com. — As  the  i<;norant  l\v  killino-  their  Atman 
whirl  in  Samsara,  contrariwise,  those  who  know  the 
Atmau  attain  «MMan<-i)»ati(tn  ;  and  they  are  not   slayers 


WITH  SHI  sankaka's  commentakv.  9 

of    the    Atman.      What    then    is   the    nature    of   tht> 
Atrnan  will  now  be  exjilaine^l. 

Anejat  is  a  conij)ounfl  of  n/f  and  ejat.  The  root  ejH 
means  to  shike.  Shakin<r  is  motion,  i.e..  devia- 
tion, from  a  fixed  jMisition.  Free  from  that,  i.  e., 
ever  constant.  It  is,  besides,  (me  in  all  Bkutas.  It  is 
fleeter  than  the  mind,  whose  charaeteristics  are  volition, 
etc.  How  is  this  inconsistent  statement  made  i.  e., 
that  it  is  c(mstant  and  motionless  and  at  the  same  time 
fleeter  than  the  mind  ?  This  is  no  fault.  This  is  iM)ssible 
with  refeience  to  its  bein<:;  thouf^ht  of,  as  unconditioned 
and  conditioned.  It  is  c(mstant  and  motionless  in 
its  nnc<mditioned  state.  That  the  mind  travels  fastest 
is  well-known  to  all,  seeing:;  that  the  mind  encased 
within  the  body  and  characterised  by  volition  and 
doubt  is  able  at  one  volition  to  travel  to  such  distant 
places  as  tiie  Brahmaloka  etc.;  and  travellinfj;  so  fast  as 
it  does,  it  perceives  on  landin*^;  (at  its  destination)  thsit 
tiie  intelliociit  Atman  has,  as  it  were,  jfone  there  before 
it  ;  therefore,  the  AtuKin  is  said  to  he  fleeter  than  the 
mind.  Devas,  from  the  root  which  means  '  enli«;hten,' 
■signifies  the  senses  such  as  the  eye.  etc.  Etat  means  the 
entity  of  the  Atman  which  is  now  liein*,'  treated  of. 
These  senses  could  not  overtake  it.     Tiie  mind  is  faster 


10  ISAVASYOPAMSHAD. 

than  these,  because  these  are  distanced  by  the  activity  of 
the  mind.     Not    even  the  semblance  of  tlie  Atmnn  is 
within  tlie  perce})tion  of  the  senses  ;    for,    it  had    oone 
even  befoiv  the  mind  whicli  is  fleeter  tlian  they,   beins:^ 
all-pervadino',  like  the^4/:rts.   The  entity  of  the  ^fmr^n. 
all-])ervadini^.  devoid  of  any  attributes  of  samsara.  and 
in  its  unconditioned  state   subject   to   no   modification. 
aj>pears  to  undergo  all  the  changes  of  samsara  super- 
posed u})on  it.  and  thouoh    one.  api)ears.  in  the  eyes  of 
iojnorant  men,  diverse  and  enclosed  in  e\ery   body.      It 
seems  to  travel  beyond  the  reach  of  otheis'  mind,  sjteech, 
the  senses,   &c.,   which   are   dissimilar   to   the  Atmaii, 
thou<i;h  they  run  fast.     The   sense   of  '  see/us '  is   suo- 
«!fested  by  the  mantra  usin^  tishthat  (sitting).  '  Sittinf/, 
means  'bein^-  itself  inactive.'     '  Tasmin'  means  '  wliile 
the  entity  of  the  Atman  endures.'  '  MaUtHsva'  means 
'  air,'    so    called,     because^     it      mo\es     (svai/att)    in 
sjmee  (riiataH — antarikshe).     Air  i'maiarisva)  is  that 
whose  activity  sustains  all    life,     on     which    all  causes 
and  effects  depend,   and    in     which     all    these     inhere, 
which  is  called   sidra  (thread,  as   it   were)   sup])ortino' 
all  the   worlds    through     which     it     runs.     The   word 
'  Ajmh'  means  all  Karma — tlu-  manifested  acti\  ity  of 
all  living  thin«is.      (This  air)  allots  to  tire,  sun,  clouds. 


WITH  SHI  sankaha's  commi;ntary.  11 

vtc,  their  several  functions  of  flaming-,  hurninj;.  sliin- 
in*4,  raininj;',  iSiv.  Or,  it  may  l>e  said  that  it  su])ports 
tliese,  from  the  Si'tctis,  such  as  "From  fear  of  this,  the 
wind  hhnvs,  vtc."  The  meaning-  is  that  all  these  mmli- 
fications  of  ef!ects  and  causes  take  place  only  while  the 
eternally  intellinjent  entity  of  the  Atriuin,  th*^  source- 
of  all,  endures. 

It  moves,  it  is  motionless.      It  is  distant,    it    is  near. 
It  is  within  all,  it  is  without  all  this.  (5) 

Com. — Showing'  that  there  is  n«)  suinMHuity  of 
mrt><^rrts,the  foWowin^  nutntra,  declares  Hj^ain  what  was 
exjnessed  hy  the  jirevious  maiitrn.  'It'  means  'the 
entity  of  the  Atnmn  which  is  hein«i-  tieated  of.*  '  EjaW 
means  '  mows.'  *  Xaijati  '  means  "  does  not  move  of 
itself.'  The  meaninii  is  that  thouj^h  motionless  in  it- 
self, it  seems  to  move.  Besides,  it  is  distant,  /.  e.,  it 
seems  to  be  far  removed,  because  it  is  not  attainable  by 
the  ignorant,  even  in  the  course  of  hundreds  of  millions 
of  a^es.  Tadvantilce  is  split  into  hid,  «t  and  untike. 
It  is  very  near  to  the  knowinj;  ;  for,  it  is  their  Atrnan. 
It  is  not  nierely  distant  and  near  ;  it  is  within  every- 
thint"-  accordini"-  to    the   Srtifi   "The  Afindii  which  is 


1 2  ISAVASYOrAXISHAD. 

within  even'thino/'  All  means  'all  the  world  of  names 
and  fonns  and  activity.'  It  is  withont  all  this,  bein^ 
all-})ervadinfi-  like  the  Akas ;  and  within  everything, 
hein<i-  extremely  subtle.  It  is  indivisible  aeeordinji;  to 
the  Si'uti  "      It  is  dense  with  knowledge," 

H^^5  =^RJTT^  rT^T  ^  f^^lj^^  II  %  II 
Who  sees  everything  in  his  Atm<vn  and  his  Atman 
in  everything,  by  that  he  feels  no  revulsion.  (6). 

Com. — Who.  i.  e,.  the  sdni/asin,  who  wishes  for 
^^mancipation.  All  Bhntas.  i.  e.,  from  the  Avt/akt(i 
down  to  the  innnoveable  creation.  '  Seeing  them  all  in 
his  own  Atman^  means  '  seeing  that  they  are  not  dis- 
tinct from  his  own  self.'  'Seeing  his  Atman  in  them 
"air  means  'seeing  his  Atru((ii  as  the  Atman  oi' i\U.'  Just 
as  he  finds  his  Atman  the  witness  of  all  his  perceptions, 
the  thinking  ])rincip1e.  ])ure  and  unconditioned,  the 
soul  of  his  body,  which  is  a  bundle  of  effects  and  causes, 
he  finds  his  Atman  iu  the  same  unconditioned  state, 
the  life  ])riuciple  of  all  the  universe,  from  the  Avijakta 
down  to  the  immoveable.  He  who  thus  views  does  not 
tuni  witli  revulsion  by  reason  of  such  view.  This  state- 
ment is  only  a  declaration  of  a  truth  already  kuown. 
All  re\  nisiou  arises  oulv  wheu    one    sees    anytliiug    bad 


WITH  SKI  sankaua's  commkntahy.  is 

distinct  from  one's  Atniftn.  To  one  wlio  sees  his  pure 
Atrrtan  alone  continuous,  tliere  is  no  other  object 
which  could  excite  the  feeliny'  of  revulsion.  Therefore 
he  does  not  tui"n  with   ie\  ulsion. 

When  to  tlie  knowei-.  all  /^/^/i^/s  heconie  one  with  his 
own  Atrtuui,  what  per))lexity.  what  ^rief,  is  there  when 
he  sees  this  oneness.  (7) 

Com. — This  other  text  also  ex}»resses  the  same 
]»ur])ort.  The  word  '  YHsmin^  means  either  *  when'  or 
"in  which  Atiwm.^  WImmi  all  the  BhitUift  have  become 
one  with  the  Atnutny  owing  to  the  knowledge  of  the^ 
Afr)if(n,  then  or  in  the  case  of  the  Atriudt.  how  can  there 
In^  perplexity  or  i;iief  ?  Perplexity  and  ^rief.  the  see<l 
of  all  desire  and  Karnta,  affect  the  ignorant,  liut  not 
him  who  sees  the  oneness,  pure  and  like  the  sky.  The 
ne«;ation  of  i)erplexity  and  j^rief — the  effvct  of  i*jnor- 
ance — beino-  shown  by  the  form  of  a  (juestion,  the  total 
u]>rootino'  of  all  s(tni8ara  with  its  seed  has  been  indi- 
cated. 


14  ISAVASYOrAMSHAH. 

He  pervaded  all.  resj)lendent.  bodiless,  scatheless, 
Imvinjjj  no  muscles,  ])ure.  untouched  by  f*in  ;  far-seeino. 
omniscient,  transcendent,  self-spruno-,  (he)  duly  allotted 
to  the  various  eternal  creators  their  respective  functions. 

(S) 

Com. — This  text  descril)es  the  real  nature  of  the 
Atmaiij  spoken  of.  in  the  previous  texts.  Salt  means 
■*  the  AtriKin  jn-eviously  spoken  of.'  '  Pavi/ar/at  means 
went  roimd.'  The  meaning;-  is  *  he  is  all-pervadin«;-  like 
the  Ak((sJ  Sukram  means  })ure,  hence  bright,  resplen- 
dent. Akdyam,  means  '  bcxliless,'  i.e..  having-  no  Untja 
SfO'ird  or  subtle,  boy.  Avrammi  means  'scatheless.' 
'^Asmtvirarn'  means  '  havino-  no  muscles.'  The  adjuncts 
Avramwi  and  Asnavirani  sliow  that  the  Abnan  has 
no  sthtdd  sainra  or  ^ross  liody,  l^y  the  word  siuldha, 
])ure  or  free  from  the  taint  of  i«;norance,  it  is  sliown 
that  it  has  no  hir<(iu(  sicnrn  or  causal  IkkIv.  *  Ajxipa- 
viddhani'  means  '  untouched  by  Kdrnin,  i-t^od  ov  liad.' 
^  Sidcrarii'  and  the  following  ejathets  are  to  lie  read  as 
masculine,  liecause  of  the  be^inninii'  "ii<l  ^''*^  <^iifl  bein«>" 
in  the  masculine,  as  sah,  hivih  etc.  Kuvlk  means 
far-seeinjx,  i.  «..  all-seein<i'  ;  for,  says  the  Sndi  *'  There 
i«  no  seer  other  than  the  Atitian,  etc."  *  Maniski  '  means 
■*  j)romptin<;  the  miud.'  hence  '  omniscient,  omnipotent.' 


WITH  SHI  SANKAHA's  COMMENTARY.  15 

Pdrihkuh  means  '  bein<f  above  all.'  Svayarnhhah  means 
•  liimself  hein<4  all  above  and  all  below  becomes  all.' 
He,  the  ever  free,  and  ()mnij)otent,  beini;  omniscient, 
allotted  their  resjiectiw  functions,  i.  e.,  olyects  to  be 
created  to  the  various  and  eternal  Prajajjfdis,  known 
lM)i)ularly  as  '  years,'  as  aids  to  the  enjoyment  of  the 
fruits  of  Kaimt/i. 

cTm  5j'7  \^  *(T  ^^\^  ?  H^ir^rr  tj^v.  w  \  ii 

They  who  worsliip  Amdya  alone  fall  into  blind  dark- 
ness ;  and  they  who  woiship  VUlipi  alone  fall  into  even 
greater  darkness.  (9) 

Com. — The  first  jturjtort  of  the  Vedas,  the  accjuisi- 
tion  of  knowledge  of  the  Brahitmu  by  renuncia- 
tion of  all  desires  has  l>een  ex2)Iained  in  the  first  mtintra 
IsdVdSjjani,  etc.  The  second  alternati\e.  i.e.,  the  s]>end- 
in^  of  life  in  continually  }>erforminfi  Kni'Ttia  lias  been 
explained,  for  the  benefit  of  the  i<>;norant  who  are  not 
ca})able  of  GiKiminishtlm ,  in  the  second  imintra  be<,an- 
nin«4  with  '  Kurvanneveha  Karmani.^  The  bifurcation. 
i.e.,  Knowledge  and  Kurnui  here  ]K)inted  out  by  these 
texts  has  also  been  clearly  indicated  in  the  Brihuda- 
ranya  Ui)anishad,  liy  the  text  "he  wished,   let  me  have 


16  ISAVASYOPANISHAI). 

a  wife,  etc."     And  from  the  texts  'Karma  for  the  ipio- 
rant  and  men   havin<;  desires '   and   '  tlie  mind  is  his 
Atman  and  speech,  his  wife,  etc.,'  it  is  clear  tliat  i*;nc- 
rance  and  desires  are  tlie  cliaracteristics  of  one  ent;at;ed 
in   tlie   ])erformance   of  Karma.     Thus,   tlie   result  of 
Karma  is  the  creation  of  the  seven  kinds  of  food  and  of 
an  indentification  of  self  with   them   considered,  as  the 
Atman.     It  has  also  hetjn  shown  that  concentration  in 
the  self,  i.e.,   the   Atman  (as   op^K^sed   to  the  perform- 
ance of  Karma)  hy  the  renunciation  of  the   three-fold 
desire  of  wife,  etc.,  is  the  only  necessary  condition  for 
tiiose  who  know  the  Atman.       Indirectly  hy  condenm- 
inii  the  ii;norant.  the   true    nature    of  the    Atman  has 
been  disclosed  to  those  sanyasins  hi^uf   on  the  accpiisi- 
tion  of  knowledge  by  the  text  beoiunins»'  witli  'Asurya- 
iiania^    and   ending    with  ' saparyagat,^  i'tc,  »o  as  to 
show  that  they  alone  and  not  those   who  have  desires 
are  (pialified  to  acquire  knowledye.      To  the  sauie   effect 
says  the  Svetasvatara  Upanishad.    *'  In  the  midst  of  a 
crowd  of  seers,  he    tauyht  the  oivatest   and    the   holiest 
truth  to  tliose  u)ho  belou'/ed  to  the  hi(jhest  order  of  life.'"' 
This  text    ^'Andhantamah"  etc.,  is  addressed  to  those 
who  desire  to  live  here  coutinually  performin>i  Karma. 
How  is  it  iuferred  that   this   text  is   addressed   to   such 


WITH  SRI  saxkaka's  commentakv.  17 

only  iiiid  not  to  all  alike?  Because,  he  who  has  no 
(lesiies  has  oot  o\er  the  false  distinction  between  nieang 
and  ends,  accordint^  to  tiie  nuintra  ''  Yasinin  sarvani 
hhitiani,  etc";  for.  it  is  easy  to  perceive  that  none  who 
is  not  a  fool  will  like  to  associate  the  knowled*;e  of 
unity  of  the  A tjiiau  VtitU  lutr iiui,  or  with  any  other 
piece  of  knowled<^e.  Hut  here,  in  view  to  combining' 
two  elements,  the  i»;norant  are  ridiculetl.  That  whicli 
can  possibly  combine  with  another,  either  from  logic  or 
from  the Sastras,  is  here  pointed  out.  It  is  the  knowledge 
of  the  deities  that  is  here  represented  as  fit  to  combine 
with  Karnui,  not  the  knowledge  of  the  P(ir<iiaat- 
nuin\^o\  a  distinct  result  is  predicatetl  of  the  know- 
ledge of  the  deities  by  the  text-  '  by  such  knowledge^ 
i\\e  Devalohi  \^  attained.'  Either  of  such  knowledge 
and  Karnttt  se[)arately  j)ursued  is  here  denounced,  not 
re'dlt/  to  comlemn  hid  in  cdew  to  the  de»iraHlity  of 
their  coriihiiuition  ;  for  distinct  fruits  are  said  to  result 
from  either  individually,  by  the  texts  "  by  such  know- 
ledge, they  climb  up  to  it,  "  •"  by  such  knowledge  is 
Dev(dok((  attained,  "'•  there  they  do  not  go  who  go 
south"  and  **  by  Kariuai>i  the  alxxle  of  the  itianes 
attained."  Jt  is  also  well-known  that  nothing  ordained  by 
the  >Sf^8^^v^s  can  ever  become  unworthy  of  performance. 

2 


18  ISAVASYOPAMSHAD. 

Here.  They  enter  into  blind  darkness.  Wlio  ? 
They  who  follow  Avidya.  Avidya  is  soniethino-  othei- 
than  Vidya  or  knowledge,  hence  Karma  ;  for  Karma  is 
opposed  to  knowledi>e.  The  drift  is  that  those  who 
are  continually  performing  Agnihotra  etc.,  alone,  fall 
into  darkness.  And  they  fall  even  into  j^reater  dark- 
ness. Who  ?  Those  who  havino-  oiven  n\)  Karma  are 
jdways  bent  u]>on  acqnirino-  the  knowledoe  of  the  dei- 
ties. Reason  is  given  for  combininjs^  Knowledoe  and 
Kaimui  each  of  which  separately  bears  diiFerent  fruits. 
[f  one  of  the  two  alone  bore  fruit  and  the  other  not, 
then  by  a  well-recoonised  law  that  which  bore  no  fruit 
by  itself  would  become  a  mere  appendage  to  the  other. 

One  result  is  ])re(iicated  of  Vidya,  and  another  of 
Avidya.  We  have  so  heard  from  wise  men  who  tauoht 
lis  both  Vidya  and  Avidya.  (10). 

C(yin. — '  Anyat  '  niejins  '  something  distinct.' 
They  say  that  by  Vidya,  some  distinct  result  is 
]»rodu('ed  according  to  \]\e  Srntis,  "  by  knowledge  is 
Devaloka  attained  "  and  *"  by  knowledge  they  climb  up 
to  it."  They  say  that  other  results  are  ],roduce;i  by 
Avidya  (/Trtrma)  according  to  tlie  text  "  by  Kai'Tiia  is 


WITH  SHI  SAXKAHA'S  COMMKNTAin'.  19 

the  aliode  of  tlie  manes  attained.  "  We  Iiave  heard  this 
stated  to  us  by  wise  men,  i.e.,  those  preceptors  wlio 
tauoht  us  both  Knowledge  and  Kamu(.  The  purjwrt  is 
that  this  is  their  view  as  lianded  down  from  ]»reoej)tor 
to  disc*ij)le. 

He  who  simultaneously  knows  both  Vidya  waA  Avid- 
Ijii  ^ets  o\er Death  by  Avidyn  and  attains  irnnunialiti/ 
by  Vidya.  (11). 

Com. — This  beiny-  so,  the  followinji;  results. 
Vidya  is  the  knowled<;e  of  the  deities ;  Avidya  is 
Karma.  Who  knows  that  both  tliese  should  simulta- 
neously be  followed  by  the  same  person,  he  alone,  so 
combinin*;'  the  two,  gntdiuUly  secures  the  one  desirable 
end. '  By  Vidya  '  means  '  b}'  Karma  such  as  Afjnihotra, 
etc'  '  Death'  means  'action  and  knowlwl<,'e  induced 
by  Prakriti  (nature).  '  '  Tirtva^  means  *  having  got 
over. '  '  By  Avidya^  means  '  by  the  knowledge  of  the 
deities.'  '  Amiide  '  means  '  attains.'  To  become  one  with 
tlie  deities  is  what  is  called  immortality  (Ami'itam.) 

^  'F  ^  '^  ^  ^  ^  ^^T  \T<\\:  W  'W  II 


20  ISA\  ASYOPANISHAI). 

They  fall  into  blind  darkness  who  worshij)  the  un- 
born PrakHti.  They  fall  into  greater  darkness  who  are 
l^ent  upon  the  Karya  Brahnian  Hiranyagarbhd.  (12). 

Corn. — Now,  in  view  to  the  combining  of  the 
worship  of  the  Avyakritd  (Prakriti)  and  manifested 
Brahman,  each  in  itself  is  denounced.  "  Asfonbhutih  " 
is  what  is  not  Savibhutih  or  that  which  is  born  of  an- 
other; hence  unborn  PrakHti.  T\n>i  aoain  is  i<;n()rance, 
cause  of  all,  known  as  AvyalcHta.  Those  who  worshi]^ 
this  Praki'iti,  known  as  AvyakHta,  ignoi-ance  which  is 
the  cause  of  all.  the  seed  of  all  desire  and  Karma,  and 
mere  blindness  in  its  nature,  fall  into  corresp<mdin<>  or 
answerinjj;  darkness  which  is  blindness  in  its  nature  ; 
and  they  who  worshi])  the  Karya  Brahman  named 
Hiraoiyarjarbha  fall  into  even  oivater  daikness. 

Thev  say  one  thinj;'  results  fioui  the  woishi]!  of 
Hiranyagarbha  and  anothei-  from  the  worship  of  Pra- 
hnti.  We  have  thus  Inward  it  stated  by  wise  preceptors 
who  tauoht  us  that.  (I'V)- 

Com. — Now,  the  (listinctioii  in  the  fruits  of 
the  two  individual  worships    is  pointed  out.  in  \  ieu     to 


WITH  SKI  saxkaha's  commentaky.  21 

tlieir  combination.  They  have  said  that  from  the 
woiKhip  of  Sftmbhutih  or-  Karya  Brahm/tn  or  Hiranya- 
i/arhh/t  results  the  attainment  oi  Aiiiifiui  and  other  Sid- 
dhis.  Similarly,  they  have  said  that  aecordinp;  to  Poara- 
iiikds  the  absor})ti(m  into  Prdkrlti  results  from  the 
worship  of  the  unborn  PralcHti.  We  liave  heard  it 
thus  stated  by  wise  preceptors  who  taught  us  the 
fruits  of  the  worship  of  PrakAti  and  Hiranyafjarbhi 
individually. 

f^T^  gc5  cTTcfr  ^^^T^rfiTT^^  II  V<  II 
Those  who  W()rsliij>  the  unmanifested  Prnhnii  and 
Hirawywjdvhhi,  (Destruction)  topjether,  jjet  over  death 
throuoh  the  worsJii]>  of  Hirnnyiujitrhlui  and  attain  im- 
mortality thr()u<;h  the  worship  of  Prakrlti.  (14). 
Coin. — As  this  is  so,  this  iiuuitr<i  declares  the 
<lesirability  of  combiuinj;  the  worship  of  Praki-iti  and 
lfir(()iy((;/((rbh((  as  they  combine  to  secure  the  one 
aim  of  the  individual.  'ViiKtsa  '  means  that  active  object 
w  hose  characteristic  attribute  is  Destructicm,  the  abstmct 
beinj»'  here  used  for  tiie  concrete.  *  By  miutsa/'  means 
•  by  the  worshij)  oiHiTdnynijarbhi.''  'Gets  over  death' 
means  '  *;ets  over  the  defects  of  vice,  desires  and  an- 
■"'isivti'^^tyu  (limited  powers) and  attains  unima  and  other 


22  ISAVASYOPAMSHAD. 

siddhis  whicli  are  the  result  of  the  wor.sliip  o{  Himnyd- 
rfarhlui.  Having-  thus  oxercome  aiuiisvm'yam,  death, 
etc..  he,  by  the  \\ovA\\\)  oi Prahriti,  attains  inimortality, 
i.  e..  absorbtion  into  Prakmii.  It  should  be  noted  that 
the  word  Sdinhhidih  is  an  a],)heresis  for  Asambhutih 
aofreeably  to  the  results  predicated,  i.  e.,  absor})tion 
into  PraJo'iti. 

cT^  ^vCTTf  ^  ^?T^m>  ^i^  II  ^  'J.  II 

The  entrance  of  the  True  is  covered  as  if  by  a  oolden 
vessel.  Remove.  0  sun.  the  coxeiino-  that  I  who  ha\e 
been  worshippino-  "The  True"  may  behold  it.         (15). 

Cam. — The  highest  result  that  could  be  achiev- 
ed, aceordino-  to  the  Sdstvds,  by  wealth  of  men  and 
the  deities  is  absorption  into  Prakriti.  V\)  to  this 
is  rotation  in  S((,msara.  Beyond  this  is  the  result  of 
tlie  pursuit  of  knowledi^e  preceded  by  a  renunciation  of 
all  desire,  i.e.,  the  seein<>;  of  the  Atman  in  everything; 
as  indicated  in  verse  7.  Thus  the  two-fold  j)urport  of 
the  Vedas.  one  stimulatinji'  to  activity  and  the  other 
drawing  to  renunciation  has  been  explained.  Tiie 
BrahrtKiiviH  uj»  to  Prav((rfj}/((  BrahmaiKt  were  utilized 
for  the  elucidation  of  the  former   purport  of  the   Vedas 


WITH  SHI  SANKAHA'S   COMMKNTARV.  2'^ 

which  is  indicated  by  mandatory  and  prohibitory 
injunctions.  The  Brikmlaranyalcct  hereafter  is  to  deal 
with  the  ehicidation  of  the  latter  purix)i-t  of  tlie  Vedas 
— renunciation.  Now,  by  what  road  he,  who  has  been 
performing;  Karma  as  enjoined  fiom  conception  to  the 
^rave  and  alonj^  with  it  the  worship  of  the  lowei- 
Brahman  in  accordance  with  \erse  11.  attains  immor- 
tality, will  be  ex[)lained.  He  who  has  been  worshij)j>in<i" 
the  manifested  Brahiaan  referred  to  in  the  jiassatje 
''That  is  the  True,  the  Aditya,  the  Purttsha  in  this  orb ; 
and  the  Purusha  in  the  left  eye;  both  these  are  true" 
and  also  has  lieen  })erformin^  Karma  as  enjoined,  en- 
treats, when  the  hour  of  death  is  arrivetl,  the  way  lead- 
in*i;  to  the  Atnuoii — the  True,  by  the  text  betjinninj; 
with  'Hirawniayena,  etc'  ' Hiranmaya^  means  seemin*; 
tijolden  hence  resplendent.  '  Pairemi '  means  as  if  by  a 
lid  forming  a  cover.  'Satyasya,^  means  'of  the  Brahman 
sittinfv  in  the  orb  of  the  Sun.'  ^ Apihitani"  means 
'covered.'  'Mukhatu^  means 'openin*;.'  ^  Apamnnu 
means  'open.'  ' Satyadharmaya,'  to  me  who  have  been 
worshi})ping  Satya  or  the  True  or  who  have  been  practis- 
ini;  Satya,  i.e.,  virtue  as  enjoined. '  '  Dris/daye  ' 
means  'for  reali/in*;  the  S(dya  or  the  Tru«'  which 
thou  art.' 


:>4  ISAVASYOPANISHAD. 

0  Sim,  sole  traveller  of  the  Heavens,  controller  of  all, 
Surya,  son  of  Prajapati  remove  thy  rays  and  gather 
up  thy  bmning  lijiht.  I  behold  thy  olorious  form  ;  I 
am  he,  the  Puriisha  within  tliee.  (16). 

CoTii. — '  Pushan,'  vocative  case  nieaninj^  '  0  8un.' 
The  Sun  is  called  Pushan  because  he  feeds  the 
world.  ^Elairahi  '  means  '  one  who  travels  alone. '  The 
Sun  is  called  Yama,  because  he  controls  all.  He  is 
<*alled  Surya  because  he  imbibes  Praiui,  rays  and  li- 
<iuids.  'Prdjapatya^  means  'son  of  Prajapati.'  'Vyuha' 
means  'remove  to  a  distance  thy  rays.'  ' Sawiuha.'' 
means  '  gather  up,  i.e.,  contract.'  *  TejaJt '  means. 
•  burning-  lii^ht.'  I  wish  to  behold  by  thy  j»race  thy 
most  glorious  form.  Moreover  I  do  not  entreat  thee 
like  a  servant.  I  am  he  the  Puraaha  within  the  solai- 
orb.  comjKJsed  oiVyahritia  as  limbs  t)r  parts.  'Puriisha' 
because  he  has  the  fioure  of  a  man  or  because  he 
l)ervades  the  whole  in  the  form  of  Prana  and  intelli- 
y;ence  or  becjuise  lie  ocou]>ies  the  city  (of  the  Soul)  i.e., 
body. 


WITH    SHI    SANKAHa'S    COMMENTARY.  25 

^  I  %^J  ^T  IFcT  K  ^^T  %^J  ^^T  ^cT  x^m  l|=l«ll 
(l^et  my)  Prmm  melt  into  the  all-pervading  Air,  the 
eternal  Sutratman;  and  let  this  body  l)e  burnt  by  fire 
to  ashes ;  Om.  ()  mind,  remember,  remember  my 
•<leeds  ;  0  mind,  lemembei-.  remember  my  deeds.  (17). 
Corn. — Now,  as  1  am  dyin^^  let  my  Praiut  leave 
its  confinement  within  this  IxmIv  and  join  the  all- 
]»ervadin<>'  f^xxUy  form  of  Air.  if. ^..  the  Satratman.  The 
word  '  reach  '  should  be  su])])lied  to  complete  the  sen- 
tence. The  idea  '  Let  my  Liivja  Sfirira  or  subtle 
liody  ])urifie(l  l)y  knowled<(e  and  Karma  ascend  '  must 
he  suj)plied  in  virtue  of  the  fact  of  the  sjieaker  en- 
tieatino-  a  passage.  Let  this  body  given  as  an  oblation 
to  the  fire  be  reduced  to  ashes.  Om,  according  to  the 
foiins  of  woishi})  being  a  j/ndihi  (substitute)  of  the 
nature  of  the  True  and  called  Afjni  is  mentioned  as  the 
same  as  Iir<(hiiu(u.  '  Krato,^  vocative  case,  meaning 
*  ()  mind  whose  characteristic  is  volition.'  *  Kemember' 
i.e.,  time  has  come  for  me  to  remendier  what  1  should. 
Kemenjber  all  that  1  have  till  now  thoiujht  of  *()  Agni, 
lemember  wliat  I  have  done^  i.e..  remember  all  K<(rma 
which  I  have  done  from  childhoixl.  The  re])etition  of 
the  same  words  'KHto  Sui(ir(C  &.c..  exjaesses  solicitude. 


26  ISAVASYOPAMSHAI). 

0  A(jni,  lead  us  by  tlie  oood  patli  to  tlie  enjoyment 
of  tlie  fruits  of  our  deeds,  knowino-  0  God,  all  oi;r  deeds. 
Remove  the  sin  of  deceit  from  within  us.  We  offer  thee 
many  prostrations  by  word  of  moutli.  (18). 

Com. — He  requests  passa<>e  ajjain  b}'  another 
mdiitra.  Xaya  means  'lead.'  ' Supat/ui^  means  by 
good  path.'  The  attribute  in  Supatha  is  used  for  the 
piiri)Ose  of  avoidino;  the  southern  route.  The  sup- 
pliant seems  to  saj*  "  I  ha\e  been  aflflieted  by  going 
to  and  for,  by  the  southern  route  iiy  which  one  goes 
only  to  return.  I  therefore  entreat  you  to  take  me 
by  the  good  road  through  which  there  is  no  going- 
and  returning."  '  Raye'  means  '  to  wealth  ;  i.e.. 
to  the  enjoyment  of  the  fruits  of  our  Kdrmd.'  '  As-niait 
means  *  us,'  possessed  of  the  fruits  of  tbe  virtue  afore- 
said. *  T'mvoji' means  'all.'  0  (rod.  '  Vnyunani' 
means  'deeds  or  knowledge.'  '  Vidvan'  means 
'Knowing.'  Besides  do  this:  '  Yiiyodk}/  means 
*  destroy.'  '  AsiiKit''  means  '  from  us.'  '  J^ihnramvm' 
means  '  consisting  in  deceit.'  '  Enah  '  means  '  sin." 
The  meaning  is  : — Thus    puiified     they     could  attain 


WITH  SHI  SANKAHAS  COMMENTAHV.  2i 

what  they  wish  for.  "  Hut  we  are  now  iinal)le  to  do 
}'oa  ac'tise  service.  We  have  to  content  ourselves  by 
offerino'  you  many  })rostrations." 

Now  a  doulit  is  raised  by  some  al)Out  the  construc- 
tion of  the  latter  halves  of  ludnti'ds  11  and  14.  We 
shall  therefore  enter  into  a  biief  discussion  to  sohe 
the  doubt.  What  the  question  is  due  to  shall  first 
be  stated.  It  is,  why  not  understand  the  term  Vidya 
in  those  passat>es  in  its  })rimary  sense  of  '  the  know- 
ledge of  the  PdrafUdtiudn,"  and  so  AiiiriUdvmu  ? 
They  aroue  thus  :  i^ranted  that  tlie  knowh^fje  of  the 
Para7nat'inmi  and  the  performance  of  Karma  are 
iriutually  anta<>()nistic  and  cannot  therefore  co-exist, 
this  antagonism  is  not  ])ercei\able  ;  for  agreement 
and  antagonism  rest  alike  on  the  authority  of  the 
S((8tra8.  Just  as  the  performance  of  Kartn,a  and  the 
accpiisition  of  Knowled<;e  are  matters  exclusively  based 
on  the  Siistras,  so  also  must  be  the  (question  of  their 
agreement  or  op})osition.  Thus  we  find  that  tlu^ 
[>rohibitory  injunction  *  Do  not  kill  any  livin*;'  thinn 
is  overridden  by  another  Sastraic  injunction  *  Kill  a 
sheep  in  a  sacrifice.'  The  same  may  apply  to  Kariud 
and  Knowledge.  If  from  the  text  "  They  are  opposed 
and  travel  different   roads.     Knowledge    and  Kdi'ma,"^ 


28  ISAVASYOPAMSHAI). 

it  is  nioed  that  tliey  cannot  co-exist,  we  say  that 
from  the  text  "  He  who  follows  both  Knowledge  and 
KariiKi,  etc,"  th<M-e  is  no  antaoonisni  between  them. 
We  answer  that  cannot  be  ;  for.  they  are  opposed  to 
■each  other  in  regard  to  their  causes,  nature  and 
results.  Hut  if  it  be  ur^ed  that  from  the  im])Ossibility 
of  Knowledoe  and  Iu(rrn((  beino-  o})])Osed  and  not 
'Op])Osed  to  eu'h  other  and  from  the  injunction  to 
<'ombine  them  there  is  no  antagonism  between  them, 
that  is  unsound  ;  for  their  co-existence  is  impossible. 
If  it  be  argued  that  they  may  gradually  grow  to  co- 
exist, it  is  untenable  ;  for  when  Knowledge  arises, 
Karma  cannot  exist  in  the  individual  to  whom  Know- 
ledge adheres.  It  is  well  known  that  when  one  knows 
that  tire  is  hot  and  bright,  he  cannot  at  the  same 
time  think  that  fire  is  neither  hot  nor  bright  ;  or  even 
entertain  a  doubt  as  to  whether  tire  is  bright  or  hot  ; 
for,  according  to  the  text  "  When  to  the  knower  all 
living  things  become  one  with  his  own  Atnian,  where 
is  grief  or  ]>er|)h'xity  to  one  who  sees  this  unity,'' 
grief  or  perplexity  is  out  of  the  (piestion.  We  have 
silready  said  that  where  ignorance  ceases,  its  result, 
Karma,  also  ceases.  The  inutwrfaliti/  in  '  attains 
inunortality  '  (in     the   i>assage     under    contem]>lation) 


WITH  SKI  SANKAKA  .S  COMMKNTAHV.  21) 

means  ivlatixe"  iniiiioitality  and  not  al>solntp  iiiinioita- 
]ity.  If  the  word  Vi<iy<(  in  those  texts  meant  the 
knowledge  of  the  7^^nY(7VMrtrtm/i,  then  tlie  entreaty  to 
the  Sun  for  alIo\\in«;'  a  passaije  would  heeome  inappro- 
j»riate.  We  tlierefore  conchule  with  ohservin<;  that 
our  inteijnetation.  i.e.,  that  the  comhination  desired 
is  of  KariiKi  with  the  worshijt  of  the  deities  and  not 
with  the  Knowled«;e  of  the  Parmimtnuin,  is  the  pur- 
]»ort  of  the  maidvds  as  commented  upon  by  us. 

Here  ends  the  Conimentary  of  Sankara  hJuKjucid- 
jiadii  on  the  Vn^'i<imue>fa  SdiiihitojMiiiishml  or  Isanitii/o- 
jKi  nishiul. 

Om  :    IVaee  \    IVaee  W    iVaee  \\\ 


{lenopaiiishai^. 


Sri  Sankaras  Introduction. 


ADORATION  TO  THE  HKAHMAX. 


OM  TAT  SAT. 

This  ninth  fha])ter  is  lieoun  for  the  purpose  of  pub- 
lishin«j;  the  Upanisliad  liei>innino;-  ^vith  Keaeshitanh 
etc.,  and,  treatinj^  of  tlie  Brahman.  Before  tlie  lie^in- 
ning  of  the  nintli  elia])ter,  all  Karma  has  been  ex- 
])lained  and  the  different  forms  of  worshippino-  Prana, 
the  soiuce  of  all  activity,  have  been  laid  down  and 
all  about  the  Sartians  (sono;s)  ])reliniinary  to  the 
rituals  ha\e  been  ^iNen.  Next  the  Gayatra  Saimm 
has  been  explained  and  the  oenealooieal  list  of  ]>re- 
<'e]»tors  and  disei])les  lias  been  oiven.  All  this  Karma 
and  Kno\vled*>e  (of  the  deities)  properly  observed,  as 
i'lijoined,  tend  to  purify  tlie  mind  of  one  who  beino- 
free  from  desires,  lon<;s  foi-  eiiian(i])ation.      In  the  ease 


WITH  SKI  sa.nkaka's  commkntaky.  31 

of  one  who  cherishes  desires  and  has  no  knowledge, 
Juirma  by  itself"  as  laid  down  by  the  Srutis  and  the 
Smritis  secures  for  liini  the  southeni  route  and 
return  to  Samsavd.  Activity  following  natural  impul- 
ses and  repugnant  to  the  S(t8iiyi8  entails  degi'adation 
into  low  birtlis  from  beasts  down  to  innnovable.s.  The 
Sriiti  says  :  '*  Travelling  by  neither  of  these  two 
paths,  these  small  creatures  are  constantly  returning, 
of  whom  it  may  be  said  :  "  He  l)orn  and  die/  This  is 
the  third  course."  Another  Si'uti  says  ''  Tlie  three 
kinds  of  living  beings  (going  by  neither  of  these  two 
paths)  reach  this  miserable  state."  The  desire  to 
know  the  Brahman  sjirings  only  in  the  person  whose 
mind  is  })ure.  who  is  free  from  desires  and  who,  free 
from  deeds  done  in  this  birth  or  in  j)revious  ones, 
liecomes  disgusted  with  the  external,  ephemeral 
medley  of  ends  and  means.  This  Brahrudn  is  dej)ict- 
ed  in  the  Upanishad  beginning  with  Kenesliitam, 
etc.,  appearing  in  the  form  of  cpiestions  and  answers. 
Katdka  says  ''  The  self-existent  has  made  the  senses 
external  in  their  activity  and  man  therefore  looks 
outward,  not  at  the  self  within."  Some  wise  man 
having  turned  his  eyes  inward  and  being  desirous  of 
immortality  saw  the  inner    self.     "  Having    examined 


32  KENOrAMSMAI). 

the  worlds  reached  by  Karmti,  let  the  Brahiriin  ^row 
disgusted  (and  learn  to  think  that)  nothin*>-  which  is 
not  made  can  be  reached  by  Karma.  In  order  to 
know  that,  let  him,  Samidk  (sacrificial  sticks)  in 
hand,  approach  a  preceptor,  who  is  well  read  in  the 
Veclas  and  who  is  centred  in  Brahriiaa."  Thus  in  tiie 
Atkarvanopaniskad.  In  this  way.  and  not  otherwise. 
a  man  free  from  desires  becomes  (jualified  to  hear, 
contemplate  and  acquire  knowledge  of  tlie  inner  self. 
By  the  knowledge  of  the  inner  self,  ignorance,  whicli. 
is  the  seed  of  bondage,  and  the  cause  of  Kantia  per- 
formed for  the  realisation  of  desires,  is  entirely 
removed.  Tlie  Srutis  say  :  *'  Theie  is  no  grief 
or  delusion  to  one  who  sees  this  unity."  "  lie  who 
knows  the  Atman  o\ercomes  grief."  **  When  lie.  that 
is  both  high  and  low,  is  seen,  the  knot  of  the  heart  is 
cut,  all  doubts  are  i-esol\ed  and  all  Jud'tiid  is  con- 
sumed." 

If  it  be  urged  that  even  by  knowledge  c<)Ui)le(l 
with  Karma  this  result  is  attained,  we  say  no  ;  for 
the  Vajasaneyaka  shows  that  that  combination  pro- 
duces different  results.  Beginning  with  '•  L(>t  me 
have  a  wife."  the  texts  go  on  to  say.  "  h\  a  son 
should  this  world  be  gained,  not   I)\   anv  other   means  : 


WITH  SKI  SANKARA'S  COMMENTARY.  33 

by  Karriia,  the  abode  of  the  manes  (Pitris)  ;  and  by- 
Knowledge,  the  world  of  the  deities  ;"  thus  showing 
how  the  three  worlds  different  from  the  Atnum  are 
reached.  In  the  same  place  we  find  the  following- 
reason  urged  for  one  becoming  a  Sanyaain  :  "  What 
shall  we,  to  whom  this  world  is  not  the  Atrnan^  do 
with  offs})ring  ?"  The  meaning  is  this  :  What  shall 
we  do  with  offspring.  Karma,  and  Knowledge  combined 
witli  Karma,  which  are  the  means  to  secure  the 
world  of  the  mortals,  the  world  of  the  manes,  and  the 
world  of  the  (iods  ;  and  which  do  not  help  us  in 
securing  the  world  of  the  ^irtWMi  ?  For,  to  us  none 
of  the  three  worlds,  transitory  and  attainable  by  these 
means,  is  desirable.  To  us  that  world  alone  which  is 
natural,  unborn,  undecaying,  immortal,  fearless  and 
neither  augmented  nor  diminished  by  Karma,  and 
eternal,  is  covetable  ;  and  that  being  eternal  cannot 
be  secured  by  any  other  means  than  the  removal  of 
ig-norance.  Therefore,  the  renunciation  of  all  desires 
preceded  by  the  knowledge  of  the  Brahrnan  who  is 
the  inner  Self  should  alone  be  ])ractised  by  us.  An- 
other reason  is  that  the  knowledge  of  the  inner  Self 
is  antagonistic  to  Km'Ttut  and  cannot  therefore  co- 
exist with  it.  It  is  well  known  that  the  knowledge 
of   tlie  Self,  the  one  Atman  of   all,    whicli    abhors  all 

3 


34  KENOPANISHAD. 

perception  of  difference,  cannot  possibly  co-exist  with 
Karma  wliose  basis  is  tlie  ])erception  of  the  dif- 
ference of  ao-ent,  results,  etc.  As  knowledge 
relatin<Tj  to  the  reality,  the  knowledoe  of  the 
Brahman  is  independent  of  Iniuum  efforts,  Theie- 
fore,  the  desire  of  a  person,  wlio  is  disousted  with 
visible  and  invisible  frnits  achievable  by  external 
means,  to  know  the  Brahnudi  wliich  is  connected  with 
the  inner  Self,  is  indicated  liy  the  Srati  be^innint;- 
with  Keneshitam,  etc.  The  elucidation  of  the  Brahman 
in  the  form  of  a  dialogue  between  tiie  preceptor  and 
the  disciple  is,  considering'  the  subtle  nature  of  the 
theme,  for  the  easy  imderstandintj^  thereof.  It  will  also 
be  clearly  pointed  out  that  this  kuowledi;e  is  v:ot  to  be 
attained  solely  by  loj'ical  discussion.  The  Sridis  say 
*'This  state  of  mind  cannot  be  obtained  by  looical  dis- 
cussion.*' "  He  knows  who  lias  studied  under  a  pre- 
ceptor." "Such  knowledoe  only  as  is  ac(juired  by 
studyinj"'  under  a  ])iece])tor  does  o<)ocl.*'  The  Smriti 
lays  down  also  "  Learn  That  by  ])rostrati()n."  It  shoulu 
be  inferred  that  some  one  duly  ajjpioached  a  jueceptor 
centred  in  Brahnutn  and  findin^^  no  refuse  except  in  liis 
inner  Self  and  lon^inp;  for  that  wliich  is  fearless,  eter- 
nal, calm  and  unshakable,  (piestioucd  the  precejitor  as 
ex])ressed  in  '  Keneshitam,  etc' 


WITH  Sin  saxkaha's  commentahy,  35 

ArJ.-KAIL  TO  THE  HKAHMAN. 

Oiii  Tdt  Sdt. 

'^"t  ^tT'cT:  I  :^TP^:  i  ^n^rT:  i 

.May  (Brahindit)  j.iotect  us  !)()tli.  .May  (Brahttian) 
<nijoy  us  both.  .May  we  work  tof^etlMn-.  Ma}' the  self- 
laiiiinous  HraltiiKta  be  studied  by  us.  May  we  not  hate 
eaeli  othei-. 

Om  Peace  :  I^•aee  !!  Peaee  I!! 

May  Miy  liuibs,  sjteeeh,  pi'an(i,  eye,  ear.  strei:L;lh  and 
n\]  uiy  senses  j^row  vigorous.  All  (everythiu*;)  is  the 
Brahman  of  the  l'])anishads.  May  1  never  deny  the 
Brahman.  May  tiie  Brahnuin  never  spurn  )ne.  May 
there  be  no  denial  of  the  Brahman.  ]May  there  be  no 
s])urnin<4'  liy  the  Brahma ii.      Let  all  the  virtues  iceited 


36  KEXOPANISHAI). 

by    the   Upanishads    repose  in    me   delighting-   in    the 
Atman  ;  may  they  in  me  rei)ose  I 

()m  Peace!   Peace  ! I   Peace!!! 

By  whom  willed  and  directed  does  tlie  mind  light  on 
its  subjects  ?  By  whom  commanded  does  jyt^imi,  the 
first,  move  ?  By  whose  will  do  men  speak  this  speech  ? 
What  Intelligence  directs  the  eye  and  the  ear  ?        (1). 

Com. — '  Kena,^  '  by  what  agent ;'  '  Ishitam, '  '  de- 
sired or  directed.'  '  Patati,'  '  goes,'  i.e.,  '  goes  to- 
wards its  objects.'  As  the  root  Ish  cannot  be  here  taken 
in  the  sense  of  '  repeat '  or  '  go,'  it  must  be  under- 
stood to  be  used  in  the  sense  of  '  wish.'  '  The  It  suffix 
in  Ishitam  is  a  case  of  Vedic  license.  The  word  Pre- 
8hita7)i  is  deri\e(l  from  the  same  root,  with  pra  before 
it,  when  it  means  'direct.'  If  the  word  Preshitmn 
were  alone  used  without  the  word  lahitdm,  cpiestions  as 
to  the  nature  of  the  director  and  directicm  might  arise, 
such  as,  by  what  sort  of  a  director  and  liy  what  sort  of 
direction.  But  the  use  of  the  word  Ishitam  sets  these 
two  (|uestions  at  rest,  for  then  the  meaning  clearly  is  : 
"  By  whose  niere  wish  is  it  directed,  etc."  It  may  ht^ 
objected,  that  if  this  meaning  were  what  was    intended 


WITH  SHI  saxkara's  commentauy.  37 

to  be  conveyed,  tlie  use  of  the  word  Preshitarti  is  ren- 
dered 8Ui)erfluons,  as  the  nieanino'  intended  is  conveyed 
by  Ishitam  alone.  It  may  be  also  objected  that  as  the 
use  of  more  words  slionld  convey  more  meaninij,  it  is 
only  reasonable  to  interjnet  the  text' as  meanin*;-  *  By 
what  is  it  directed,  by  mere  will,  by  act  or  by  word  ?' 
Both  these  objections  are  unsound.  From  the  mere 
fact  of  the  question  havin*>'  b'^en  asked,  it  is  a]>])arent  that 
the  (juestion  is  asked  by  one  who  is  dis^^usted  with  tlie 
ei)hemeral  conglomeration  of  causes  and  effects,  such  as 
the  body,  etc.,  and  who  seeks  to  know  something  other 
than  that — somethin<>;  unchangeable  and  eternal.  Were 
it  otherwise,  the  (juestion  itself,  seeinji;  how  notorious 
in  the  world  is  the  fact  that  the  body  directs  i)y  means 
of  will,  act  or  word,  would  be  meaningless.  If  it  1^ 
objected  that  even  on  this  view  there  is  nothintj;  gained 
in  the  sense,  by  the  use  of  the  word  Preshitam,  we  say 
no.  The  word  Preshitam  adds  to  the  sense  when  we 
think  that  a  (juestioner  really  entertains  a  doubt.  To 
show  that  the  question  is  jn'ompted  by  a  doubt  in  the 
questioner's  mind,  as  to  whether,  as  is  notorious,  tlie 
body — the  collection  of  causes  and  effects — directs  the 
mind,  etc.,  or  whether  the  mind,  etc.,  is  directed  by  the 
mere  will  of  anytliing  otlier  than  these  ct^iibinations  of 


38  KENOrAMSHAD. 

causes  ;nid  effects  and  acting'  iiidei)endeiit]y.  tlie  use  of 
botli  the  words  Ishitami  and  Preshitam  is  jnstifialile. 
If.  however,  it  be  ur<>ed  that  tlie  mind  itself,  as  every 
body  knows,  indej)endently  li^lits  on  its  own  object, 
and  that  tlie  cjuestion  is  itself  inelevant,  the  argument 
is  untenable.  If  the  7nind  were  independt^nt  in  the 
pursuit  of  its  objects  or  in  desisting-  from  piirsuit,  then 
it  is  not  ])Ossible  for  any  one  to  contemi)]ate  evil  ;  but 
man,  conscious  of  evil  results,  wills  evil,  and  the  mind 
though  dissuaded,  atttMiipts  deeds  of  serious  evil  con- 
st^uences.  Therefore  tlie  (|uesti(>n  Keneshitam,  etc.,  is 
certainly  appropriate. 

By  whom  directed  does  Praiia  ^o,  i.e.,  about  its 
own  business  ?  PrathaniH  is  an  appropriate  adjecti\  e  of 
Prdna,  as  the  activity  of  all  th.e  sensory  ori;ans  pre- 
supposes it.  By  whom  ))rompte(l  is  th(^  s])eech  which 
men  in  the  world  make  use  of?  And  what  Intelli- 
ijence  directs  the  eye  and  the  ear  towards  their  res])ect- 
ive  olijects  ? 

^fcT^^  v^Vr:  "JT^T^qi^T^TTgrn  ^¥r\  II  ^s  II 
It    is   the    ear   of  the   ear.    mind   of   tlie   miml.    ton- 
gue of  the  tongue,  and  also    life  of   the    life  and    eye  of 


WITH  SHI  sankaha's  commkntauy.  39 

the  eye.      Beiii^-  (lisfil)usH(l  of  the  false  notion,  the  wise, 
havin*^-  h^ft  this  b(xiy,  become  iiiiniortal.  (2). 

Co7ii. — To  tlie  wortliy  (disciple)  who  had  thus 
questioned  him,  the  piecejjtor  in  rejjly  says  :  "  Hear 
what  you  ask  for — what  intelli«jent  Beino-  directs 
the  mind  and  the  otlier  senses  towards  their  resi)ect- 
ive  objects,  and  how  it  directs  tliem."  Ear  is  that 
by  which  one  liears,  i.e.,  the  sense  whose  function  is  to 
hear  sounds  and  distinuuisli  them.  He,  you  asked  f(n\ 
is  the  ear  of  that. 

May  it  not  be  objected  that  while  the  reply  ()U«;ht  to 
run  in  the  form.  'So-and-so.  with  such-and-such  attri- 
butes, directs  the  ear,  etc.,'  the  reply  in  the  form  '  He 
is  the  ear  of  the  ear,  etc..'  is  inaj)i)roi)riate  ?  This  is  no 
objection  ;  for  he  (the  directoi)  cannot  otherwise  be 
partic-ulari/ed.  If  the  dinn-tor  of  ^the  ear.  etc..  can  be 
known  by  any  activity  of  his  own.  independent  of  the 
activity  of  the  ear,  etc.,  as  a  ]»eison  who  directs  another 
to  <;ive,  then,  indeed,  would  this  i'ovin  of  answer  become 
inappropriate.  But  we  do  not  here  undei-stand  a  direct- 
or of  the  ear,  etc.,  havin«;  any  activity  of  his  own.  like 
a  mower.  The  director  is  infernni  by  logical  necessity 
from  the  activity  manifested  by  the  ear  and  others 
coMd)ined,  such  as  deliberation,  volition,  determination 


40  KENOPANISHAD. 

enuring  for  tlie  benefit  of  sometliin^  distinct  from  tlieni 
all  (the  ear,  etc).  As  things  combined  necessarily  exist 
for  the  use  of  some  otlier  thing  not  so  combined,  we 
argue  that  there  is  a  director  of  the  ear,  etc.,  distinct 
from  the  ear,  etc.,  and  for  whose  use  tlie  wliole  lot — the 
ear,  etc., — exists  in  the  same  manner  as  a  liouse  exists 
for  somebody's  use.  Hence  the  reply  *  It  is  the  ear  of 
the  ear,  etc.,'  is  certainly  approjni  ite. 

Again  it  is  asked  wliat  is  the  meaning  of  the  exjnes- 
sion  :  "  It  is  the  ear  of  the  ear,  etc."  And  it  is  said 
that  one  ear  does  not  want  another,  just  as  one  light 
needs  not  another.  This  objection  has  no  force.  The 
meaning  here  is  tliis.  The  ear  has  been  found  ca])a- 
ble  of  perceiving  objects  and  this  capability  of  the  ear 
depends  ui)on  the  intelligence  of  the  Atrtian,  bright, 
eternal,  intact,  all-i)ervading.  Therefore  tlie  ex})res- 
sion  '  It  is  tlie  ear  of  the  ear.  etc.,'  is  coirect.  To  the 
same  effect  also,  the  SriUis  say,  "  He  shines  by  his  own 
brightness.  "  "  By  his  light  is  all  this  Universe  illu- 
mined." "  By  tiiat  ligiit  illumined,  does  the  sun 
shine,  etc.,"  and  so  on.  The  Bhdgavad  GiUi  says  "  As 
the  light  in  the  sun  ilhunines  the  whole  world,  so  does 
the  Atniaii  (K8hetri)(.)  Bkavdta  I  ilhuuine  all  the  body 
(Kshetrum).''     The  Katha   also  says,  "He  is  the  eternal 


WITH  SHI  HANKAKA'S  COMMENTARY.  41 

niiion^'  the  non-eternal  and  the  intelligence  among' 
the  intelligent,  "  The  '  ear,  etc.,'  have  been  by  all  con- 
founded with  tlie  Atnum  and  this  falHe  notion  is  here 
dispelled.  The  reply  of  the  ])recepter:  there  is  some- 
thing indescribable,  cognisable  only  by  the  intelligence 
of  the  wise,  occupying  the  deepest  interior  of  all.  nn- 
oliangeable,  nndecaying,  immortal,  fearless,  unboni  and 
'  the  ear  of  the  ear,  etc' — the  source  of  all  their  func- 
tional capacity,  is  ajtprojn-iate  and  the  meaning  also. 
Similarly  it  is  the  mind  of  the  mind.  It  is  evident 
tliat  the  mind,  if  not  illumined  by  the  bright  intelli- 
gence witliin,  will  be  inca])able  of  ))erforming  its  func- 
tions of  volition,  determination,  etc.  It  is,  therefore, 
«aid  that  it  is  the  mind  of  the  mind.  Hoth  the  condi- 
tioned intelligence  and  mind  are  together  contemi)late<l 
by  the  word  '  mind  '  in  the  text.  The  word  t/<it  in 
*  Yadvdchohdvachaoti'  means  '  Ix^cause'  and  should  be 
read  along  with  the  words  Srotra  (ear),  nianak  (nund), 
<^tc.,  thus :  '  because  it  is  the  ear  of  the  ear,'  '  because 
it  is  the  mind  of  the  mind,'  etc.  The  objective  case 
(vacham)  in  '  Yachohivachain^  should  he  converted  in- 
to the  nominative  case,  for  we  next  read  '  Pronasya- 
praiiak.^  It  may  lie  said  that  conformably  to  the  ex- 
pression  '  Vachohavacharri'  the  following    '  Pranaaya- 


42  KENOPAMSHAn. 

pranah'  may  as  well  be  read  as  "  Pi'anasyaprariam^ 
It  cannot  he,  for  conformity  to  tlie  majority  is  desir- 
able. So  '  vnchfcni,  should  be  read  as  '  w^'j '  in  confor- 
mity to  '  Sah  '  and  '  Franuh  '  in  *  S<i  u  imuiasya- 
-pranah,'  because  it  then  conforms  with  two  words  and 
conformity  to  the  majority  is  preferred.  Besides,  the 
substance  asked  about  can  be  best  denoted  by  a  noun  in 
tlie  nominative  case.  The  substance  asked  about  by  you 
is  ihe  prdiKi  of  prami.  i.e.,  it  is  that  substance  which 
endows  prami,  with  tlie  capacity  to  dischai'^c  its  func- 
tions, i.e.,  to  infuse  activity  ;  for  there  can  j)Ossil>ly  be 
no  activity  where  the  Atmau  does  not  preside.  "  Who 
could  live  and  breathe  if  there  were  not  the  self-lumi- 
nous Bi'dhman  ;"  and  "  He  leads  Prana  up  and  Apana 
down  "  say  tlie  Srn.tis.  It  will  also  be  said  in  this 
Upanishad,  "  You  know  that  to  be  the  Brd/iman  which 
infuses  activity  into  Prana."  It  may  be  said  that,  in  a 
context  s])eakinii"  ^^^  ^''^  f'^i'  i'l^*^  other  senses,  the  men- 
tion of  Breath  would  l)e  more  a])])i()piiate  than  that  of 
Prana.  Truly  so  ;  but  in  the  use  of  the  word  Praiia. 
breath  is  meant  to  be  included. 

The  SriUi  thinks  thus  : — the  oist  of  this  j)ortion  is 
that  that  is  lirahrnan  for  whose  use  the  ai^orei^ation  of 
the  senses  exerts  its  combiued  activitv.      Siiuilarlv  it  is 


WITH  SHI  sankaha's  c'om.mentaky.  43 

the  eye  of  the  eye.  Sic.  The  eapaeity  of  the  eye  to  ptM- 
eei\e  foiin  is  found  only  where  the  intelli<;enee  of  the 
Atman  directs  it.  Therefoiv  it  is  the  eye  of  the  eye. 
After  this  expression  in  the  text,  tlie  expression  '  hav- 
ing- undeistood  the  liriiltinmi  as  ahove  defined,  i.e.,  as 
the  ear  of  the  ear,  vte..'  must  he  snjiplied  by  the  reader, 
as  th<^  r|Uestionei-  slioiiUl  he  sujiposed  to  he  anxious  to 
know  wiiat  he  asked  about.  Another  reason  why  the 
expression  should  be  su])plied  is  the  enunciation  of  the 
result  'they  become  immortal  ;"  for  it  is  only  by  wisdom 
that  iuunortality  is  attained  and  it  is  only  by  knowled,i,'e 
one  can  attain  emancii)ation.  Noving  (jiveii  tip  (ill  the 
sensory  ortjans  ;  (It  is  by  confoiuiriino-  the  ear  and  other 
sensory  organs  with  \\\e  Atinan  that  man  is  U)rn  subject 
to  these  conditions,  dies  and  thus  rotates)  means  '  liav- 
ini;-  leaint  that  the  Atniau  is  the  /^)Y//t?>irt?i  defined  as 
the  ear  of  thecal',  ifcc'  Athnachy<i  nwnwi^  *  having; 
i^iven  up  the  false  notion  that  the  ear.  &.v..  is  the  Atmnn; 
for,  without  the  aid  of  the  hinhest  intelligence,  it  is 
impossible  for  one  to  ;Liive  up  the  notion  that  the  ear. 
Sec.  is  t\u'  AtiiKdi.  '  Pretyd' un'nu>i  *  having-  turned 
away,  '  Asnidllohit''  means  '  from  this  world,  where  the 
talk  is  always  of  '  my  son,'  '  my  wife,'  '  my  kith  and  kin.' 
The  drift  is  '  havinir  renounced  all  desires.'     *  Become 


44  KENOPANISHAD. 

iinniortal '  means  '  enjoy  ininumity  from  death.'  Tlie 
Srutis  also  say  "  Not  by  deeds,  not  by  offspring',  not  liy 
wealth,  but  by  renunciation  did  some  attain  immortal- 
ity "  ;  "  The  senses  were  made  to  perceive  only  exter- 
nal objects  ;"  "  Havin^  turned  his  senses  inwards  for 
desire  of  immortality"  ;  "  When  all  desires  are  driven 
forth,  here  they  attain  the  Brahman"  &c.  Or,  seeinji 
that  the  word  Atimuchya  necessarily  im])lies  '  renun- 
ciation of  all  desires,'  the  expression  ^  Asmallolcat  in^etya" 
may  be  interpreted  as  '  having  left  this  mortal  body.' 

?J%cT^f^  X.^^T^^^^  (TT^fecTT^T  '?n^f^^T^fvq-  I 

^  W^^  ^^i"  '^  ^^cT^T=^^n^>  II  X  II 

The  eye  does  not  oo  tliere,  nor  S})eeclu  nor  mind. 
We  do  not  know  That.  We  do  not  know  liow  to  in- 
struct one  about  It.  It  is  distinct  from  the  known  and 
alx)ve  the  unknown.  We  have  lieard  it  so  stated  by 
prece])tors  who  tauolit  us  that,  (3). 

Com. — For  the  reason  tliat  the  Brakmau  is  the  ear 
■of  the  ear,  i.e.,  the  Atnian  of  all.  tlie  eye  cannot  i^o  to 
the  Brhrtutn  ;  for  it  is  not  iK>ssible  to  ijjo  to  one's  own  self. 
Similarly  speech  does  not  <>;o  there.  When  a  word 
sj)oken  by  the  montli  enlightens  the  object  denoted  In' 
it,  then  the  word   is  said  to  i;()  to  that  object.      Hut  the 


WITH    SHI    SANKAKA'S    CO.MMEN'IAUY,  45 

Atnmn  of  that  word  iuid  oftlie  orpni  that  utters  it  is  the- 
Brahman.     So  the  word  does   not    i;o   there.     Just  as 
fire  that  burns  and  enlightens  things  doen  not  either 
enlighten  or  l)urn  itself,  so  the  mind,    which    wills  and 
determines  in  respect  of  external    objects,    cannot    will 
or  determine  in  res})ect  of  its  self,  because  its  AimKin  is 
also  the  Brahman.     A  thing  is  cognised  by  the  senses- 
and  the  mind.     We  do  not,  therefore,  know  the  Brah- 
man, because  it  cannot  be   an  object    of  perception  to 
these  ;  and  we  do  not,  therefore,  know  what  the  Brah- 
man is  like,  so  as  to  allow  us  to  enlighten  the  disciple 
about  the  Brahman.     Whatever  can   lie  ])erceived  by 
the  senses,  it  is  possilile  to  explain  to  others  by  epithets 
denoting  its  class,  its  attributes  and  modes  of  activity  ; 
but  the  Brahman  has  no  attributes  of  class,  etc.      It, 
therefore,  follows  that  it  is  not  possil)l('  to  n>ake  the  dis- 
ciple believe  in  the  Brahman  by  instruction.     The  j)or- 
tion  of  the  text  beginning  with  '  Xavidniah''  (we  do  not 
know)  shows  the  necessity  of  putiiug  forth    great  exer- 
tion in  the  matter  of  giving  instruct  ini  and  iniderstand- 
ing  it,  in  respect  of  the  Brahman.     Cbnsideiing  that 
the  previous  jjortion  of  the  text  leads  to  the  conclusion 
that  it  is  imi)Ossible  by  any  means  to  instruct  one  about 
the  Atman,  the  following  exceptional  mode  is  pointed 


•46  KKNOPAMSHAI). 

out.  Indeed  it  is  true  tlmt  one  cannot  be  ])ersuaded  to 
believe  in  the  Brahiivin  by  the  evidence  of  the  senses 
and  other  modes  of  proof;  Init  it  is  possible  to  make  liim 
believe  by  the  aid  of  A(j((i>ias  (Scriptures).  Therefore 
the  preceptor  recites  Af/fiinas  for  the  purpose  of  teacli- 
ini!,'  about  the  Brahinroi  and  says  :  '  It  is  some- 
tliinii;  distinct  fr,^m  tlte  known  and  somethin;^-  beyond 
the  unknown,  etc'  "  .-ly^ycff.'  *  somethiui;-  distinct'; 
'  7Vi.'  'the  j)resent  theme;'  i.e..  that  which  has  been 
defined  to  lie  the  ear  of  the  (^ar,  etc.,  ani  beyond  their 
(ear.  eye,  etc..)  reach.  That  is  certainly  distinct  from 
the  known.  'The  known,'  means  'whatever  is  the 
object  of  special  knowledi;e  ;'  and  as  all  such  objects 
■can  be  known  somewliere.  to  some  extent  and  by  some 
one  and  so  foith,  the  whole  (manifested  universe^)  is 
meant  bv  the  teiin  '  Hie  known  ;'  the  drift  is.  that  the 
Brahma  )i  is  distinct  from  this,  l^ut  lest  the  Bra  I  j  nan 
should  be  confounded  with  the  unknown,  the  text  siys  : 
'  It  is  beyond  the  Unknown.'  ^  Aviditat^  means  's  .nie- 
thin<i'  op]>os(nl  to  the  known  ;'  hence,  unmanil'i-sted 
illusion  (avidya)  the  seed  of  all  manifestation.  '  Adhi 
literally  means  '  aliove "  but  is  here  used  in  the  deriva- 
tive sense  of  '  somethino-  different  from  ;"  for,  it  is  well 
known  that  one  tiling"  placed  aboNc  another  is  some- 
thin^' distinct  from  that  other. 


WITH  SKI  SANKAKA's  COMMf:NTAKY.  47 

Wliatever  is  known  is  little,  mortal  and  full  of  misery 
iuul,  therefore,  fit  to  he  ahandoned.  Therefore  when 
it  is  said  that  Brahman  is  distinct  from  the  Known,  it 
is  dear  that  it  is  not  to  he  ahandoned.  Similarly,  when 
the  Braltiitau  is  said  to  l)e  distinct  from  the  Unknown 
it  is  in  effect  said  that  the  Brah'rnan  is  not  fit  to  he 
taken.  It  is  to  j)roduc<^  an  etitect  that  one  seeks  for  a 
cause.  Therefore  there  can  he  nothing'  distinct  from 
the  knower,  which  the  knower  could  seek  for,  with  any 
henefit.  Thus,  hy  saying-  that  t]\i'  BrahtnaQi  is  distinct 
fioni  hotli  the  Known  and  the  L'nknown  and  thus  dis- 
])rovin^'  its  fitness  to  he  ahandoned  or  to  he  taken,  the 
ilesire  of  the  disciple  to  know  anythin;^  distinct  fiom 
Self  (Abiian)  is  checked.  For,  it  is  clear  that  none 
other  than  one's  Atman  can  he  distinct  from  lx)th  the 
Known  and  the  Tuknown  ;  the  ]>urj)ort  of  the  text  is 
tliat  the  Atrttan  is  Hraliiuan.  The  Sndis  also  say  : 
"This  AtnKin  is  Brahiuau  ;"  "  this  Atnuin  who  is  un- 
touched hy  sin."'  "This  is  the  known  and  the  iniknown 
Brahman  f  "  This  .4f7/<^fH  is  within  all;"  etc.  The 
preceptor  next  says  how  this  meanin<;  of  the  text,  that 
tlie  Atman  of  all.  marked  hy  no  distinouishin*;  attri- 
hutes,  liri^ht  and  intelligent,  is  the  Brahmaiu  has  been 
traditionally  handed  down  from   jirecejjtor   to  discii)le. 


48  KENOPAXISHAI). 

And  Brahman  can  be  known  only  by  instruction  from 
preceptors  and  not  by  logical  disquisitions,  nor  by  ex- 
positions, intellioence,  orent  learning,  penance  or  sacii- 
fices,  etc.  We  have  heard  this  saying  of  the  preceptors 
who  clearly  taught  us  the  Brahman. 

Wliat  speech  does  not  enlighten,  but  what  en- 
lightens speech,  know  that  alone  to  be  the  Brahman, 
not  this  which  (people)  here  worshij).  (4). 

Com. — When  by  the  text  '*  It  is  something  distinct 
from  both  the  known  and  the  unknown, "  the  preceptor 
conveyed  that  the  Atman  is  Brahman,  the  disciple 
doubted  how  the  Atman  could  be  Brahman.  The  At- 
inan,  as  is  well  known,  being  entitled  to  perform  Karma 
and  worship  (of  the  gods)  and  being  subject  to  births 
and  re-births  seeks  to  attain  Brahrtia  or  other  Devas,  or 
heaven,  by  means  of  Karvia  or  worship.  Therefore^ 
somebody  other  than  the  Atnum,  such  as  Vishnu,  7s- 
vara,  hulra  or  Prana,  entitled  to  be  worshii)ped,  may 
well  be  Brahman  ;  but  the  Atman,  can  never  be  ;  for 
it  is  contrary  to  poi)ular  belief.  '  Just  as  logicians  con- 
tend that  tiie  Atman  is  distinct  from  Isvara,  so  tiie 
votaries  of  Karma  worshi])  Devas,  other  than  the  Atman, 


WITH  SHI  SAN'KAHA'S  COMMENTARY.  49 

saying  :  '  Propitiate  this  Deva  by  sacrifice '  and  *  Pro- 
pitiate tiiat  Deva  by  sacrifice. '  Therefore  it  is  only 
reasonable  that  what  is  known  and  entitled  to  worshi}» 
v^  Brahman  and  that  tlie  worsliii)i)er  is  other  than  that. 
The  prece])tor  inferred  this  doubt  running  in  the  dis- 
ciple's mind  either  from  his  looks  or  from  his  words  and 
said  :  '  Do  not  doubt  thus. '  Yat  means  '  that  which  is 
intelligence  itself?  Vak  is  the  organ  presided  over  by 
Aijni  (Fire)  occui)yingeiglit  localities  in  the  lx)dy,  such 
as  the  root  of  the  tongue,  &c.  The  letters  are  intend- 
ed to  express  the  meaning  to  be  conveyed  and  are  sul)- 
ject  to  laws  as  to  their  number  and  order.  The  woixi 
which  is  produced  by  them  is  called  Vak  (speech.)  The 
Sriiti  says  "  The  letter  a  is  all  speech,  which  being- 
produced  liy  the  use  of  letters,  divided  into  sparsa,  an- 
tastha  and  nakma  liecomes  diverse  and  assumes  many 
fornis."  Tlie  Uik,  Yajur,  Santia  and  truth  and  false- 
hood are  its  modifications.  By  such  speech,  enclosed 
in  words  and  conditioned  by  the  organ  of  speech,  Brah- 
Tiian  is  not  illumined  or  explained.  '  Yena,^  *by  the 
Brahman.^  Brahman  by  its  brightness  illumines  speech, 
and  its  organ.  It  has  been  said  here  that.  That 
(Brahman)  is  the  speech  of  speech.  The  Vajasaneyaka 
snys  '  Brahma)!    is  within    the  s])eech    and  directs  it. ' 

4 


50  k?:nopamshai). 

Having  said  '  Speech  in  man  is  tlie  same  as  that  in  tlie 
letters  and  tliat  some  Brahmin  knows  it,'  the  l'])ani- 
shad,  in  answer  to  a  question  anticipated,  says  "  Tl»at 
is  si)eecli,  hy  which  one  speaks  in  dreams.  "  The  s]»eak- 
er's  power  of  speech  is  eternal,  and  is  hy  natme  of  the 
same  essence  as  Intelligence.  The  power  of  s])ceel!  of 
the  speaker  knows  no  decay.  So  says  the  Sruti.  Know 
this  AtTtian  to  be  the  Brahman,  unsurj)assable,  known 
as  Bhwma.  Brahman,  because  it  is  big,  all-pervading; 
know  this  through  its  conditions  of  speech,  etc.  The 
following  expressions  'speech  of  speech,'  '  eye  of  the 
eye,'  'ear  of  the  ear,'  'mind  of  the  mind,'  *doer,'  'enjoyer,' 
'  knower,'  '  controller,'  '  governor,'  '  Brahman  is  know- 
ledge and  bliss,'  etc.,  are  used  inpoj)ular  language  of  the 
uns])eakable  Brahman,  devoid  of  attributes,  highest  of 
all,  unchangeable.  Disregarding  these,  kuow  i\\i.^Atiiian 
itself  to  be  the  unconditioned  i^jWtmau.  This  is  the 
meaning.  Brahman  is  not  what  people  here  worshi]), 
such  as  Isvara,  which  is  not  the  Atman,  and  wliich  is 
conditioned  and  referred  to  as  '  this. '  Though  it  had 
l^een  said  '  know  That  to  lie  Brahman,^  still  it  is  again 
«aid  :  "  and  not  this,  etc.,"  thus  repeating  the  idea  that 
what  is  not  Atman  is  not  Brahman.  This  is  either  to 
lay  down  a  Niyanui  (a  rule  restricting  the  choice  to  a 


WITH  SHI  SANKARA's  COMMENTARY.  51 

stated  alternative  when  several   others  are    (])Ossible)  or 
for  Pdi-isaiMiyaiui  (exclusion). 

What  one  cannot  think  with  the  mind,  but  by 
which  they  say  the  mind  is  made  to  think,  know  That 
alone  to  be  the  Brahnian.  not  this  which  (}teoj)le)  here 
worshi]).  (5) 

Com. — '  Mdtiah,^  'mind.'  By  the  wonl  '  Maunh* 
here,  both  mind  and  intelligence  are  meant.  '  Mdiuih^ 
means  'that  by  which  one  thinks.'  The  mindis  etjually 
connected  with  all  the  sensory  organs,  because  its  sphere 
includes  all  external  objects.  Th^^  Srnti  says:  'Desire, 
volition,  deliberati(m,  faith,  Me<iii<>ence,  boldness,  timi- 
<lity,  shame,  intelli«;ence,  fear,  all  these  are  inind.'  The 
modes  of  activity  of  tlie  mind  are  desire,  etc.  By  that 
mind,  none  wills  or  determines  that  intellij2;ence  which 
enlightens  the  mind,  because  as  enliohtener  of  the 
mind,  that  is  the  mind's  controller,  the  Atmaii  beinjjj 
in  the  interior  of  everything,  the  mind  cannot  ^o  there. 
The  ca})acity  of  the  mind  to  think  exists,  because  it  is 
enliohtened  by  the  intelligence  shinins>  within,  and  it  is 
l»y  that,  that  the  mind  is  cajiable  of  activity.  Those  who 


o2  KENOPAMSHAI). 

know  the  Brahman  say  that  the  mind  iis  pervaded  by 
the  Brahman.  Therefore  know  tliat  to  be  the  Brahmxtn 
which  is  the  Atrnan,  the  interior  intellioence  of  the 
mind.  '  Nedam,  etc.,'  has  already  been  explained  in 
the  commentary  on  the  last  verse. 

cf^  ^m  c^  T^ik  ^t  ^^^^m^  II  '-^  II 

What  cannot  be  seen  by  the  eye.  bnt  by  which 
the  eyes  are  able  to  see,  That  alone  know  thon  to  lie  the 
Brahman ;    not  this  which  (people)  here  worship.      (6) 

Com. — '  See'  means  '  perceive  as  an  o1)ject.'  By  the 
light  of  the  Atm,an,  connected  with  the  activities  of  the 
mind,  man  perceives  the  activity  of  the  eye.  vaiyinj; 
with  the  activity  of  the  mind. 

?rE^'t^^  ST  ^JTUtfrT  ^^  ^^iT^?|<TH  I 
cT^^  sT^  c^  T>R  M  2lte5^Hcr  II  ^  II 

What  cannot  be  hea  rd  with  the  ear,  bnt  by  v\  Inch 
the  ears  are  able  to  hear.  That  alone  know  thon  ti)  be 
the  Brah^nan  ;  not  this  which  (])eo])le)  here  worshi]).(7) 

GoTYi. — 'What  cannot  be  lieard  with  the  ear'  iiu'ans 
'which  the  world  does  not  perceive  as  an  object  with  the 
oroan  of  hearinjTj,  presided  o\y^Y  hy  Diifdevata.  ]>r()(hu'e(l 
in  Akax  and  coniKM-ted  with  tlie  activity  of  the  mind.' 


WITH    SKI    SANKAHA'S    COMMENTARY.  53 

■  By  which  the  ears  are  able  to  hear,'  it  is  well  known 
that  it  is  perceived  as  an  object  by  the  intelligence  of" 
the  AtiiKtn.     The  rest  has  been  already  explained. 

cTf^  sT^  c^  f^VS  "^t  ^ft^rg^TfTcT  II  ==  II 

What  none  breathes  with  the  breath,  but  by 
which  breath  is  in-breathed,  That  alone  know  thou 
to  be  the  Brah'inan ;  not  this  which  ('])eo])le)  here 
woiship.  (8) 

Com. — '  What  none  breathes  w  itii  the  breath'  means 
'what  none  j)erceives,  like  odour,  with  the  earthly  breath 
fillin<i,  the  nostrils  and  connected  with  the  activity 
of  the  mind  and  life.'  '  But  by  which,  etc.,'  means  *  by 
the  enlinhtenino  intellip^ence  of  the  Atnuin,  breath  is 
made  to  move  towards  its  objects.'  All  the  rest  Hadeva,^ 
■etc,'  has  already  been  explained. 

Here  ends  the  first   ]tart. 


Kcnopani^hob, 


SECOND  PART. 


"cT  ^  f^f^cTH  II  ^  ir 

If  thou  thinkest  '  1  know  well'  it  is  certainly  but 
little — the  foiin  of  the  Brcihman  thou  hast  kno^^^l,  as 
also  the  form  in  the  Devas.  Therefore  I  think  that 
what  thou  thinkest  known  is  still  to  be  ascertained.!  9) 

Com. — Th*^  ])reeeptor,  fearing  that,  the  disciple  per- 
suaded to  believe  that  he  is  \\\i^  Atman.i.e.,  the  Brahman 
not  fit  to  be  abandoned  or  acquired,  mifyht  think  'I  cer- 
tainly am  the  Brahman,  I  know  myself  well,'  says  for 
the  puipose  of  dispelling'  that  notion  of  the  disci])le 
Yadi,  etc.  Then,  is  not  an  accurate  conviction  '  I  know 
(Brahman)  well'  desirable  ?  Certainly  it  is  desirable- 
But  an  accurate  conviction  is  not  of  the  form  '  I  know 
(Brahman)  well.'  If  what  should  be  known  becomes 
an  object  of  sense-] >erce] >tion  then  it  is  possible  to  know 


Wini  SHI  SANKARA'S  rOMMp:XTAHY.  55 

it  well,  just  a.s  an  inflaiiiiiiahle  substance  can  be  con- 
sumed by  the  consuming-  fire.  But  the  essence  of  fire 
cannot  itself  be  so  consumed.  The  well-ascertained 
drift  of  all  Vedanta  is  that  the  Self  (Atman)  of  every 
knower  is  the  Brahman.  The  same  has  been  here  ex- 
plained in  the  form  of  question  and  answer  by  the  text 
'  It  is  the  ear  of  the  ear,  etc'  The  same  has  been  still 
more  clearly  determined  by  the  text  :  "  What  is  not 
enlijuhtened  by  speech,  etc."  The  traditional  theory  of 
those  who  know  the  Brahiiian  has  also  been  declared  by 
the  text  :  "'  It  is  somethin«>;  different  from  both  the 
known  and  the  unknown."  This  Ui)anishad  will  also 
conclude  by  saying;  "  It  is  unknown  to  those  who 
know,  and  known  to  those  who  do  not  know."  It  is, 
tlierefore,certainly  pro])er  that  the  notion  of  the  discii)le, 
'  I  know  Brahman  well  '  should  be  dispelled.  It  is 
evident  that  the  knower  ciinnot  be  known  by  the  know- 
er, just  as  fire  cannot  be  consumed  by  fire.  There  is 
no  knower  otlier  tlian  i\w Brahman,  to  whom  the  Brah- 
man can  be  a  knowable,  distinct  from  himself.  By 
the  Sruti  :  "There  is  no  knower  other  than  that,"  the 
existence  of  another  knower  is  denied.  The  belief,  there- 
fore, '  I  know  Brahman  well'  is  an  illusion.  Therefore 
well  did  the  ]»rece]»tor   say  '  Vadi.  etc'      ''Yadr  means 


56  KENOPANISHAD. 

^  if  perchance.'  ''Suved(C  means  '  I  know  Brahman  well.' 
Because  some  one  whose  sins  have  been  pureed  and 
who  is  really  intelligent  may  properly  understand  what 
is  tauoht  and  others  not,  the  i)rece])tor  begins  with  a 
doubt  '  Yadi,  etc'  8uch  cases  have  also  been  found 
to  occur.  When  he  was  informed  '  This  purusha  who 
is  seen  in  the  eye,  this  is  the  Atman  ;  this  is  the  im- 
mortal, fearless  self,'  Virochana,  the  son  of  Prajapati 
and  the  lord  of  the  Asaras,  thouoh  intellipjent.  mis- 
interpreted this  instruction,  on  account  of  his  natural 
defects  and  understood  that  the  body  was  the  AtTnan. 
Similarly,  Indra,  the  lord  of  the  Devas,  not  beinc  able  to 
com})rehend  the  Brahman,  at  the  first,  second  and  third 
instructions,  did,  at  the  fourth,  his  natural  faults  having- 
been  removed,  com])rehend  the  very  Brahman  that  lie 
was  first  taught.  It  has  been  found  in  the  world  also, 
that,  of  disciples  receiving  instruction  from  the  same 
preceptor,  some  understand  him  j)roperly,  some  mis- 
interpret his  teaching,  some  interpret  it  into  the  exact 
contrary  of  the  teacher's  view  and  some  do  not  under- 
stand it  at  all.  What  more  need  we  say  of  the  know- 
ledge of  the  Atm,an  which  is  beyond  the  reach  of  the 
senses.  On  this  jKunt,  all  logicians,  with  their  theories 
of  Sat  and  Asitt,  are  in  conflict.     The  doubt,  therefoie, 


WITH  SHI  SANKAKA'S   COMMENTARY.  57 

<»x|)ressed  in  '  Yadi  mnanyase,^  etc,  witli  which  the  pie- 
<;e})tor  begins  his  discourse  is  certainly  a))proi)riate,  con- 
sidering that  the  discijiles,  in  spite  of  tlie  instruction 
that  the  Brahnian  is  unknowable,  inij^ht  haw  misunder- 
stood him.  '  DiihariC  means  '  little'  ;  *  Vettha  Means 
*  knowest' ;  i.e.,  thou  knowest  surely  little  oi Brahman' 8 
form.  Has  Brahinan  then  many  forms,  jjreat  and 
little,  that  it  is  said  '  daharain,  etc'  ?  Quite  so ;  many, 
indeed,  are  the  forms  of  Brahnuin  j)ro<hiced  by  condi- 
tions of  name  and  form,  but  none  in  reality.  By  nature, 
as  the  Sritti  says,  it  is  without  sound,  touch,  form,  des- 
truction; likewise,  tasteless, odourless,  and  eteraal.  Thus 
with  sound,  etc,  foruj  is  denied.  But  it  may  be  said 
that,  as  that  by  which  a  thino  is  defined,  is  its  rupaor 
foiin,  the  jieculiar  attribute  of  Brahman  by  which  it  is 
defined,  may  be  said  to  be  its  form.  We  thus  answer : 
Intellijijence  cannot  be  the  quality  of  the  earth,  etc., 
<^ither  of  one  or  all  of  them  to<»;ether.  or  under  any 
modifications.  Siuiilarly,  it  cannot  be  the  quality 
<if  the  sensory  organs,  like  the  ear,  etc,  or  of  the 
mind.  '  Brahniano  rdpam,''  Brahman  is  defined  by 
its  intelligence.  Hence  it  is  said  :  "  Brahman  is  know- 
ledge and  bliss  ;'  '  Brahman  is  dense  with  knowledge'  ; 
■*  Brahman  is  existence,  knowledge  and  infinity '  ;  thus 


58  KENOPANISHAD. 

the  form  of  Brahman  has  been  defined.  Truly  so  ; 
but  even  there,  the  Brahinan  is  defined  by  tlie  words 
'  knowledoe,  etc.,'  only  with  reference  to  tlie  limitations 
of  mind,  body  and  senses,  because  of  its  apparent 
adaptations  to  the  exapansion,  contraction,  extinction, 
etc.,  of  tlie  body,  etc.,  and  not  on  account  of  its  own 
essence.  According-  to  its  essence  it  will  be  concluded 
in  the  subsecjuent  pcn-tion  of  this  Upanishad  that  it  is 
unknown  to  those  who  know,  and  known  to  those  who 
do  not  know.  The  ex})ression  '  Yadasya  bo^aJirtiana 
rupami'  shoidd  be  read  alonsj  with  w  hat  precedes  it.  Not 
only  dost  thou  know  little  of  the  form  of  Brahman. 
when  thou  knowest  it,  as  conditioned  in  man,  but  also 
when  thou  knowest  it  as  conditioned  in  the  Devas  ;  so^ 
1  think.  P^ven  the  form  of  Brahman  as  it  exists  in  the 
Devas  is  little,  because  it  is  limited  liy  condition.  The 
gist  is  that  the  Brahman  limited  by  no  conditions  or 
attributes,  ])assive,  infinite,  one  without  a  second,  known 
as  Bha'nia,  eternal,  cannot  be  known  well.  This  beino- 
so,  I  think  that  you  haw  yet  to  know  Brahman  by  en- 
quiry.' ^Atha  nu,'^  therefore.'  ^Mimamsyamj'  'worthy  of 
en(piiry.'  Thus  addressed  by  the  preceptor,  the  disci] )le 
sat  in  solitu<le  all  composed,  discussed  within  himself 
the  meaning  of  the  At/ama  as  pointed  out  by  his  (Juru 


WITH  SKI  sankaka's  COMMKNTAKY.  59' 

(preceptoi),  arrived  at  a  eonclusioii  by  liis  reasoning',, 
realised  it  in  himself,  apijroached  the  preceptor  and  ex- 
claimed "  1  tliink  1  now  know  Brahman" 

JTTt  ^^  l^trT  ^T  ST  %^frT  ^  =^  I 

^t  ^?(T|^  cf5T  ^I  ^  ^^fcT  M  =^  II  '<o  II 

I  do  not  think  1  know  well  ;  I  know  too  ;  not  that  I 
do  not  know.  He  of  us  who  knows  that,  knows  that 
as  also  what  is  meant  l>y  '  1  know  too  ;  not  that  I  do 
not  know.'  (1<J) 

Com.— On  V)eino  asked  how,  the  disciple  says  t 
"  Listen.  I  do  not  think  I  know  lirahinan  well."  "  Then 
is  the  Brahruan  not  known  by  thee?"  Thus  cpiestion- 
ed,  the  disciple  says  "  Not  that  1  do  not  know,  1  know 
too;"  the  word  ioo  in  '1  know  too'  means  'I  do  not 
know  too.'  is  it  not  contradictory:  '  1  think  I  know  not 
Hrahiiiau  well  etc.  ?'  If  thou  dost  not  think  thou  know- 
est  w^ell,  how  then  dost  thou  think  thou  knowest  also  ? 
If  again  thou  thinkest  thou  certainly  knowest,  then 
how  dost  thou  think  thou  knowest  not  well?  To  say 
that  a  thing  is  not  known  well  by  the  man  who  knows 
it  is  a  contradiction,  the  eases  of  doubt  and  false  know- 
ledge being  left  out  of  consideration.  Nor  is  it  possible 
to  lay  down  a   restrictive  rule   that    the    knowledge   of 


^0  KENOPANISHAD. 

Brahman  should  be  doubtful  or  false.  It  is  well 
known  that  under  any  eircunistances.  doubtful  or  false 
knowledge  works  oivat  evil.  Thouiih  thus  attempted 
to  be  shaken  in  his  conviction  by  the  prece])tor  the 
disciple  was  not  shaken.  From  the  tradition  which 
his  master  had  ex})lained  to  him,  i.e.,  that  the  Self  is 
somethinti  other  than  both  the  known  and  the  unknown, 
from  the  reasonableness  of  the  doctrine  and  from 
the  strength  of  his  own  ex})erience,  the  disciple 
Qoudly  exclaimed,  showing  the  firmness  of  his 
knowledge  of  the  Brahman.  How  lie  exclaimed  is 
thus  stated.  "  He  of  us,'  i.e.,  my  co-disciple,  who  cor- 
rectly understands  what  I  have  said,  knows  That  (Brah- 
man). T\w  words  he  referred  to  are  '  not  that  I  do  not 
know.  I  know  too.'  What  was  defined  by  the  expres- 
sion 'that  is  something  other  than  both  the  known 
and  the  unknown',  the  disci})le  discussed  and  decided 
from  inference  and  from  expeiience ;  and  in  order  to 
•see  wliether  the  ])receptor"s  views  agreed  with  his  own 
and  to  counteract  any  false  conclusion,  which  dull 
|)ersons  may  ha\e  arrived  at.  he  expressed  the  same  in 
different  words  :  '  not  that  1  do  not  know  ;  1  know  too.' 
The  confident  exclamation  of  the  disciple  '  He  of  us, 
•etc.,'  is  accordingly  appro])riate. 


WITH  SKI  sankaka\s  commextaky.  Ql 

^mwf  cT^  Tct  ^<^  ^m  ^  %t  b:  i 

It  is  Known  to  him  to  whom  it  is  Unknown  ;. 
he  knows  it  not  to  whom  it  is  known.  (It  is)  Un- 
known to  those  who  know,  and  Known  to  those  who  do 
not  know.  (11) 

Com. — Turnin«;  from  the  cononrrin^  views  of  the 
preceptor  and  tlie  disciple,  the  Sruti  speaking  for  itself 
conveys  in  this  text  the  view  abont  whicii  there  is  no 
disafjjreenient.  The  pnr}K)rt  is  that  to  the  knower  of 
the  Brahmaii  whose  firm  conviction  is  that  the 
Bralmian  is  unknowable,  the  Brahraan  is  well  known.. 
Bnt  he,  whose  conviction  is  that  the  Brahman  is 
known  by  him.  certainly  knows  not  the  Brahman. 
The  latter  half  of  the  text  only  states  those  two 
distinct  conclusions  of  the  wise  and  ionorant  man  more 
emj)hatically.  To  those  who  know  well,  the  Brahman 
is  certainly  (a  thinij)  unknown  ;  but  to  those  who  do 
not  see  well,  i.e.,  who  confound  the  Atrnan  with  the 
sensory  oro;ans,  the  mind  and  the  conditioned  intelli- 
gence l^Biiddhi],  Brahman  is  certainly  not  known,, 
but  not  to  those  who  are  extremely  itjjnorant ;  for,  in 
the  case  of  these,  tlie  thought  '  Brahnuin  is  known  by 


•62  KENOPAMSHAI). 

us'  never  arises.  In  tlie  case  of  those  wlio  find  the 
Atriian  in  the  conditioned  organs  of"  sense,  mind  and 
intellioence,  the  false  notion  'I  know  Brahman' 
is  quite  ])OSsil)le,  because  tlie}'  cannot  discriminate 
between  Brahman  and  these  conditions  and  because 
"the  conditions  of  intelli<^ent'e,  etc..  are  known  to  tliem. 
It  is  to  show  tliat  such  knowledoe  of  tlie  Brahman  is 
fallacious  that  the  latter  half  of  the  text  is  introduced. 
•Or,  the  latter  half  '  Avijnatani.  etc'  may  be  con- 
•strued  as  furnishino-  a  reason  for  the  view  propounded 
in  the  former. 

jncT^Tv:rf^T^  ^^^^^^  ff  f%^^  i 

(The BrahTnan)  is  known  well,  when  it  is  known 
:a8  the  witness  of  e\ery  state  of  consciousness;  for  (by 
•such  knowledoe)  one  attains  inunortality.  By  his  Self 
Jie  attains  streni^tii  and  by  knowledye.  inunortality.  (12j 

Com. — It  has  been  settled  that  it  is  unknown  to 
those  who  know.  If  Brahman  be  not  known  at  all,  it 
will  then  come  to  this,  that  there  is  no  difference 
between  the  worldly-minded  and  those  who  know  the 
Brahman.  To  say  that  It  is  unknown  to  those  who 
know   is    also  a  contradiction.     How    then  could   that 


WITH  sm  kankaha's  commkntaky.  G3 

Brahman  be  well-known  ?  This  is  explained  in  this 
text,  '  Pratibodfuividitam '  means  '  known  in  iesi)ect 
of  every  state  of  consciousness.'  By  the  word  '  bodha  ' 
is  meant  *  mental  peicei)tion.'  That  by  which  all  states 
of  consciousness  are  jierceived  like  objects  is  the  Atman. 
Ife  knows  and  sees  all  states  of  consciousness,  being  by 
nature  nothini;-  but  intelligence  and  is  indicated  by 
these  states  of  consciousness,  as  blended  with  every  one 
of  them.  There  is  no  other  way  by  which  the  inner 
Atman  could  ])e  known.  Therefore  when  the  Brah- 
•man  is  known  as  the  witness  of  all  states  of  conscious- 
ness, then  it  is  known  well.  Being  the  witness  of  all 
states  of  consciousness,  it  will  be  clear  that  it  is  intelli- 
gence in  its  essence,  subject  to  neither  birth  nor  death, 
+»ternal,  |)vue,  unconditioned,  and  one  in  all  things,  l3e- 
ciiuse  there  is  no  difference  in  its  essence,  just  as  in 
the  essence  of  the  Ahis,  in  a  vessel  or  mountain  cave, 
etc.  The  drift  of  the  })assage  from  the  Af/anuis  [tra- 
ditions] is  that  the  Brahman  is  other  than  both  the 
known  and  the  unknown.  It  is  this  j^ure  Atman  that 
will  be  described  at  the  close  of  the  UpanisJtad. 
Another  Sruti  says  '*  He  is  the  seer  of  the  eye,  the 
hearer  of  the  ear,  the  thinker  of  thought,  and  the 
knower  of  knowledge."   But  some  explain  the  ex])vession 


64  KENOPAMSHAD. 

^  Pratibodhaviditam/  iw  t])^^  text  as  ineaiiiiio-  'known 
by  its  defining  attribute  of  knowledge,'  on  the 
view  that  Brahman  is  tlie  autlior  of  the  act  of  know- 
ing and  that  Brahman  as  such  autlior  is  known  by  its 
activity  in  knowing,'  just  as  the  wind  is  known  as  that 
which  sliakes  the  branches  of  the  trees.  In  this  view 
the  Atnian  is  an  unintelligent  substance  having  the 
power  to  know  and  not  intelligence  itself.  Conscious- 
ness is  ])roduced  and  is  destroyed.  When  conscious- 
ness is  produced,  then  the  Atinan  is  associated  with  it  ; 
but  when  it  is  destroyed,  the  At7)ian,  dissociated  from 
consciousness,  becomes  a  mere  luiintelligent  substance. 
Such  being  the  case,  it  is  not  possible  to  get  over  the- 
objection  that  the  Atnum  is  rendered  changeable  in  its 
nature.  com])Osed  of  parts,  transient,  impure,  etc.  Again 
according  to  the  followers  of  Kanada  consciousness  is 
said  to  be  produced  by  the  combination  of  the  Atnian 
and  the  mind  and  to  adliere  to  i\\^  Atnian.  Therefore, 
the  Atnian  possesses  the  attribute  of  knowledge  but 
is  not  subject  to  modifications.  It  simply  becomes 
a  substance  just  like  a  ])i)t  made  red.  Even  on  this 
theory  the  Brahman  is  reduced  to  an  unintelligent  sub- 
stance and  therefore,  the  Sridis  ^Brahman  is  knowledge 
and   bliss,  etc.,'   would    bje  set    at  naught.      Moreover 


WITH  SHI  SANKAKA'S  COMMENTARY.  65 

the  Abmin  ha\in^'  no  parts  and  being  omnipresent 
and,  therefore,  ever  connected  (with  the  mind),  the 
impossibility  of  laying  down  a  law  regulating  the  origin 
of  recollection  is  an  insurmountable  objection. 

Again  that  the  Atrnan  can  be  connected  with  any 
thing  is  itself  repugnant  to  the  Srutis,  Smritis  and 
logic.  '  The  At7aan  is  not  conriectetl  with  anything 
else;  '  The  Atnuin  unconnected  with  anything  supjiorts 
e\erything;  so  say  both  the  S)'uti  and  the  SviHti. 
According  to  logic,  too,  a  thing  having  attributes  may 
be  connected  with  another  having  attributes  and  not 
with  one  dissimilar  in  class.  To  say,  therefore,  that  a 
thing  having  no  attribute,  undifferentiated  and  having 
notliing  in  common  with  anything  else,  condiines  with 
anotlier  unequal  in  class  is  illogical.  Therefore,  the 
meaning  that  the  Atman  is,  by  nature,  knowledge  and 
light,  eternal  and  undecaying,  can  beamved  at,  only  if 
the  Atinan  be  the  witness  of  all  states  of  consciousness, 
and  not  otherwise.  Hence  the  meaning  of  the  expres- 
sion '  Fratibodhaviditaiii  iwitaiti'  is  just  what  we 
explained  it  to  be.  Some,  however,  explain  that  the 
drift  of  this  portion  of  tlie  text  is  that  th*^  Atman  is 
knowable  by  itself.  There  the  Atnuia  is  thought  of  as 
conditioned  and  people  talk  of  knowing  the  Atman  by 

5 


"66  KENOPANISHAD. 

the  Atni((,ii,  distin«>uisliiiii;-  as  it  were,  the  uiieoiiditioii- 
■ed  Atnum  from  the  Atnidii  conditioned  by  intelligence, 
<^tc.  Thus  it  has  lieen  sai  1  "  lie  sees  the  Atniau  by 
the  Atnian"  and  "()  Best  of  men  !  know  the  At)n,<(n 
by  the  Atmari,  thyself."  It  is  clear  that  the  uncon- 
ditioned Atnian,  beinjij  one,  is  not  capable  of  beinjij 
known  either  by  itself  or  by  others.  Beini>-  itself  the 
knowin<»;  princi]»le,  it  cannot  stand  in  need  of  another 
knowin<>-  principle  ;  just  as  one  lii>ht  cannot  ])()ssibly  re- 
quire another  liyht.  So  here.  On  the  theory  of  tlie 
followers  of  Buddha  that  the  Abnan  is  known  by  itself, 
knowledj^e  becomes  momentary  and  no  Atwtnt  as  its 
knower  is  possible.  It  is  well  known  that  the  know- 
ledge of  the  knower  knows  no  destruction,  heinii; 
indestructible.  Ajiain  the  Srti.t'is  :  '  Him  who  is 
f^ternal,  omniinvsent  and  all-])er\a(hn<;-,'  "I'his  is  lie, 
^reat,  unborn,  Atrnan,  undecayino,  deathless,  immortal 
and  fearless,'  etc.,  would  be  set  at  naught.  Some, 
however,  construe  the  word  '  Pratihodlui '  to  mean 
■*  causeless  ])erce]>tion'  as  that  of  one  who  slee]>s. 
Others  yet  say  that  the  word  " Pratihodha^  means 
*  knowledge  of  the  moment.'  (We  answer)  whether 
it  has  or  has  not  a  cause,  whether  it  occurs  once  or 
is     oft<'n     repeated,     it     is  still   PratibmUut,  itself    or 


WITH  SHI  SANKAH.VS  COM.ME.NTAUY.  67 

knowledi'e  itself.  The  drift  is  tliat  the  BrnhiiKdi  known 
as  the  witness  of  all  states  of  consciousness  is  well- 
known,  because  by  such  knowle(l<;e,  one  attains  ini- 
inortality,  i.e.,  bein<i'  centred  in  one's  self,  i.e.,  enianci- 
])ation.  The  knowled«;;e  that  the  Atnimii  is  the  witness 
of  all  states  of  consciousness  is  the  reason  for  inunortal- 
ity.  liniuortality  carniot  possibly  be  the  fact  of  the 
Athytit  ))ecomin^-  souiethin;;'  other  than  itself.  The 
immortality  of  the  ^4f//(i/</?,  consistinj;'  in  \t*^h^if  Atnum, 
is  causeless;  thus  the  mortality  of  the  AttiKdi  consists 
in  the  mistaken  belief  of  no  *  Atitutit''  induced  bv  i<;no- 
rance.  How  ai^ain.  it  may  be  asked,  does  one  attain 
iinmortality  l)v  the  knowledi^i^  of  the  AtiiKin  as  already 
ex[)lained  ?  It  is,  therefore,  said  as  follows  :  '  Abtmna  ' 
means  '  by  one's  own  natine  ;'  '  Viuddte"  means 
'  attains  ;'  *  Virydiit'  means  *  stren««th  or  capacity."  The 
strength  j^ained  by  wealth,  letinue.  iiuintrtts.  me<licinal 
herbs,  devotion  and  (/0(/a  cannot  overcome  nioi-tality, 
because  that  is  produced  by' things  themselves  mortal. 
The  stren<;th  gained  iiy  the  knt)wled«^e  of  the  AtiiKin 
can  be  ac(juired  by  tlie  Atriuin  alone  and  not  by  any 
other  means.  Because  the  strength  produced  ])y  the 
knowledge  of  the  Aiiiidii  does  not  require  any  other 
aid,   that    strenj>tli    alone  can    overcome    death.      And 


68      '  KENOPAXISHAD. 

because  one  ae(juires  by  bis  Atman  alone  tbe  strenotli 
produced  by  tbe  knowledoe  of  tbe  Atman,  tberefore 
he  attains  immortality  by  tbe  kno\vled<;e  of  tbe 
Atnum.  Tbe  Atharvamt  Upaniskad  says  "Tbis 
Atman  cannot  be  attained  by  one  devoid  of  strenotb.'* 

If  one  knows  (Tbat)  bere,  tben  tliere  is  trutli.  If  one 
knows  not  (Tbat)  bere,  tbere  will  be  great  loss.  Tbe 
wise,  seeing  tbe  one  Atrtutn  in  all  created  tilings,  baving 
turned  away  from  tbis  world,  become  immortal.       (13) 

Coin: — It  is,  indeed,  bard  to  suffer  birtb,  old  age, 
deatb.  sickness,  etc.,  owing  to  ignorance,  being  one  of 
tbe  crowd  of  living  beings,  sucb  as  Devas,  men,  beasts. 
(j/i^etas),  etc.,  full  of  tbe  miseries  of  Samsara.  Tbere- 
fore if  a  man,  even  in  tbis  world  being  autborised  jnul 
coin])etent,  knows  the  Atnum  as  defined,  in  the 
manner  already  explained,  tben  tbere  is  truth  ;  i.e.. 
tliere  is  in  tbis  birtb  as  a  mortal,  innnortality,  usefulness, 
real  existence.  But  if  one  living  here  and  authorised 
(\oe»  not  know  the  Brahman,  tben  there  is  long  and 
great  misery  for  bim,  i.  e.,  rotation  in  S((insara —  ' 
one  cDiitinuous  stream  of  biiths  and  deaths.    Therefore 


WITH  SRI  SANKARA'S  COMMENTARY.  69 

the  Braliniins  who  know  the  advantages  and  the  dis- 
advantaf;es  as  above  pointed  out,  perceive  in  all  things 
in  the  iiniveise,  immoveable  and  moveable,  the  one  es- 
sence of  the  Atnutn,  i.e.,  the  Brah^aan,  turn  away  with 
flisoust  from  this  world,  the  creature  of  ignorance  con- 
sisting in  the  false  notion  of  'I'  and  *  mine'  and  having 
realised  the  principle  of  unity,  the  oneness  of  the 
:At7)Uin  in  all,  become  innnoiial,  i.e.,  l>ecome  Brahman 
itself ;  for,  the  Sruti  says  "  He  who  knows  that  highest 
Brahiiian  becoines  Brahiiian  itself." 

Here  ends  the  Second  Part. 


l\cnopauiel)ab 


THIRD  PART. 


The  Brahnmn  won  a  Aictoiy  for  the  Devas  and  in 
that  victory  of  the  Brahman  tlie  Devas  attained  ftlory. 
They  tlioufijht  '  tlie  victory  is  ours  and  this  <;lory  is 
ours  alone.'  (14) 

Corn. — From  tlie  passafve  that  'It  is  not  known  to 
those  who  know,'  some  fools  may  ai<>iie  that  whatever 
is,  can  be  known  by  proofs,  and  whatever  is  not  cannot 
be  so  known  and  is,  therefore,  non-existent,  as  the  horns 
of  a  hare,  and  Brahman,  beiny;  unknown,  does  not 
exist.  In  order  that  they  may  not  fall  into  that  error 
this  ])arable  is  introduced  ;  for.  the  subsecjuent  ])assa!:;es 
clearly  show  the  folly  of  tliinkin<»'  that  that  lira/niKdi 
who  is  controller  of  all  in  every  way,  Deva,  even  sujxM-ior 
to  all   Det'dfi,  Lord    over  lords,    not    easily   known,   the 


WITH  siu  sankaha's  commextaky.  71 

cause  of  tlie  victory  of  the  JJevafi  and  of  the  defeat  of 
the  As ar(i8  does  not  exist.  ( )r  (it  is  rehited)  for  euk)ois- 
uv^  the  knowU'd^e  of  Brahman.  How  ?  J{y  showin*^ 
tliat  it  was,  indeed,  l)v  the  knowh^l^e  of  the  lirahvuin 
that  Fire,  etc.,  att'iiiied  |)re-eniinenceanion«;'  the  Devas  ; 
and  Indva  sjxH'ially  more  than  the  rest.  Or,  it  shows 
how  difficult  it  is  to  know  Brahntan,  because  even 
Fire,  etc,  with  all  their  »;reat  powers,  and  even  ludva, 
lord  of  the  Devas  knew  the  Bvahiaau  only  with  consi- 
deralile  difficulty.  It  ^nay  be  that  the  whole  Upanisfuni 
to  follow  is  intended  to  lay  down  an  injunction  (to 
know  the  Brahman)  or  the  story  may  have  been  in- 
tended to  show  the  fallacious  nature  of  the  notion  of 
doer,  etc.,  found  in  all  livino-  bein«;s.  by  contrasting  it 
with  the  knowledge  of  the  Brahman — fallacious  like 
tlie  notion  of  the  l)ev((s  that  the  victory  was  theirs. 
The  Brahman  aheady  defined  won  a  victory  for  the 
benefit  of  the  y>i9«v<,s  ;/.«.,  the  Brahman  in  a  battle 
between  the  Devas  and  the  A  suras  defeated  the  Asaras, 
the  enemies  of  the  world  and  the  violaters  of  the  limi- 
tations injposed  by  the  Lord  and  fi^ave  the  benefit  of 
the  victory  to  the  Devas  i'ov  the  preservation  of  the 
world.  In  this  victory  of  i^r^/t/Hr/ji  the  Devas,  Fire, 
etc.,  attained  <,dory.  and  not  knowini;  that   the    victory 


72  KEXOPAMSHAD. 

and  glory  belontred  to  the  Pao'araatman,  seated  in  their 
own  Atman,  the  witness  of  all  perceptions,  TiOrd  of  the 
universe,  omniscient,  the  dispenser  of  the  fruits  of  all 
Karma,  omnipotent,  and  desirous  of  securin<Tj  the  safety 
of  the  world,  looked  upon  the  victory  and  the  glory,  as 
achieved  by  themselves — the  Atman  enclosed  within 
the  limitations  of  their  own  forms.  Fire.  etc.  ;  that  the 
glory — their  being  Fire,  Air,  Indra  and  the  like,  result- 
ing from  the  victory — was  theirs  and  that  neither 
the  victory  nor  the  glory  belonged  to  the  TiOrd,  over 
all  the  At'inan  within  them.  So  they  cheiislied  this 
false  notion. 

<T^  r^irlT  'Ir^l  ^  5[T^^     cT^    ??T3TTiT(T    T%fq^    ?T^m% 

II  '^y,  II 

He  knew  this  notion  of  tlieirs  and  ai)peared  before 
them.  What  that  (freat  Spirit  was  they  did  not  know. (15) 

Com. — The  Brakman  evidently  knew  this  false  no- 
tion of  theirs.  Brahman  being  onmiscient  and  direct- 
or of  the  senses  of  all  living  beings  knew  of  the  false 
idea  of  the  Devas  and  in  order  that  the  Bevas  might 
not  be  disgraced  like  the  Asuras  by  this  false  notion, 
out  of  pity  fin-  them  and  intending  to  bless  them  by  dis- 
pelling their  false  notion,     api)eared     before    them  for 


WITH  SKI  SANKARA's  COMMENTARY.  73 

tlieir  benefit  in  a  form  assnniefl  at  will,  in  virtue  of  its 
power — a  form  nnprecedentedly  f^loriouts  and  astonish- 
in^'  and  capable  of  bein^-  perceived  by  the  senses.  The 
Devas  did  not  at  all  know  the  Brahnian  that  appeared 
before  them.  Who  is  this  Ydhshirti,  i.e.,  this  venera- 
ble (freat  Spirit. 

^^^J(H  in  ^11  ^\^^  v^^in  f%  ^nfftf^fi^  <gt  ^^  nf^ 

fqtrT  II  '1  ^  II 

They  addressed  the  Fire  thus  '*  ()  Jataveda  I  Find 
out  what  this  (ireat     Sjtirit  is."    He  said  '*  yes."     (IG) 

He  ran  to  That.  That  said  to  him  "  who  art  thou  ?" 
He  replied  "  I  am  A;/iil  or  I  am  Jataveda."  (17) 

That  said  "what  power,  in  thee  so  named,  is  lodged.' 
He  replied  "I  can  burn  even  all  this,  (m  the  earth."  Cl8) 

That  i)laced  a  straw  before  him  and  said  :  *  Burn 
this.  '  He  a])pro}vche(l  it  with  all  haste  but  was  not 
able  to  burn  it.  IFe  immediately  returned  from  thence 
to  the  Devas  and  said  '*  I  was  not  able  to  learn  what 
this  Great  Spirit  is."  (19) 


,74  KEXOPAMSHAI). 

Com. — The  Devas  not  knowing  what  tlint  Spirit  was, 
being  afraid  of  it,  and  (lesiions  to  know  what  it  was, 
thus  addressed  A<pii  wlio  went  liefore  tliein  and  wlio 
was  little  less  than  omniscient.  *'  ()  J(tta,veda,  learn 
well  what  this  Grreat  S[)irit  now  in  our  \iew  is.  You 
are  the  hri<vlitest  of  ns  all.*'  "Be  it  so"  said  A(/ni 
and  ran  towards  the  Spirit.  Seeing-  him  a])proach  near, 
with  a  desire  to  ask  questions  of  it,  but  o\erawed  into 
silence  in  its  presence,  the  Spirit  asked  him  :  "  who  art 
thou  ?  "  Thus  (juestioned  by  Brahman,  Ar/ni  replied : 
"I  am  Affni  well  known  also  as  Jataveda"  ;  as  if  in 
self-complaisance  at  beino-  so  well  known  by  two  names, 
Bralttnaa  said  to  A(jni  who  had  thus  replied  :  "  what 
power  is  in  thee  who  ownest  such  well-known  and  signi- 
ficant names.  ?  "  He  replied  :  '"  I  could  reduce  to 
ashes  all  this  universe  and  all  immoveables,  etc.,  on 
this  earth."  The  word  *  earth  *  is  illustratively  used  ; 
for,  even  what  is  in  the  air  is  burnt  by  A<ini  [Fire]. 
The  brahman  placed  a  straw  before  Aijni  who  was  so 
vain-glorious,  and  said  :  "  Burn  but  this  straw  in  my 
presence.  If  thou  art  not  able  to  burn  this,  give  up 
thy  vanity  as  the  consumer  of  all.  "  Thus  addressed, 
Ar/ni  approached  the  straw  with  all  the  sj)ee<l  of  over- 
weening confidence  but  was  not  able  to  burn  it.      So  he. 


WITH  SKI  sankaha's  commkxtaky.  75 

JaUiveda,  l)eiii^'  uri}tl)U*  to  hum  it,  covered  with  shame 
and  haliied  in  his  resohition,  retiunied  in  silence  fVoni 
the  presence  of  the  Sj)irit  and  told  the  Dev((8  :  '*  I  was 
not  al)le  to  learn  more,  conccrniniH  this  Spirit.  " 

ifw-mfm^  [\\\\\  cT?%  sen  f^^'^r^^TT^^'^fcT  (T^^^rme^- 
?i^mrlT  II  *<x  II 

The  Devas  then  said  to  Vaya  :  ''  J^ani  ()  Vaya  * 
what  this  (Ireat  Spirit  is  "  He  said  :  "  yes."  (20) 

He  ran  to  That.  That  said  :  "  who  art  thou  "  ? 
l[e  replied  :  *"  I  am   ]'ayii  ov  Mdtarlsva.  "  (21) 

That  said  "  what  power  is  in  thee  ;  so  well  known  ?  "" 
He  replied  :  ''  I  can  hlow  away  all  the  universe  and  all 
that  is  on  the  earth."  (22) 

That  }>laced  a  straw  hefore  him  and  said  '*  Blow 
it  away.  "  He  appioached  it  w  ith  all  speed  hut  was 
not  able  to  blow  it.  He  returned  innnediately  from 
there  and  told  the  Devas  "  I  was  not  able  to  leani  who 
this  (xreat  Spirit  is.  "  (23) 


76  KENOPANISHAD. 

Com. — Tliey  next  addressed  Fa-i/if'tlius  :  '  know  tliis. 
etc. '  Tlie  vest  bears  tlie  same  nieanino-  as  in  tlie  last 
passage.  Vayu  [^Aii']  is  so  named  from  tlie  root  which 
means  '  to  go  'or  '  to  smell.'  Vayu  is  also  called  '  Mata- 
Hsva^  because  it  travels  \_svayati^  in  space  [jinatart]. 
*  Adadiya7)i  '  ineans  '  can  take. '  The  rest  is  explained 
as  in  the  i)revious  i)assage. 

^RTgm  ^.flT^  m  cTT  ^fl^r^  T%JTcT^^iTTrr  II  "<%  II 

Then  they  said  to  Indrd  :  '*  0  Maglunan  I  learn  what 
this  (freat  Spirit  is."  He  said  "  yes  "  and  ran  to  That. 
That  vanished  from  his  view.  (24) 

He  beheld  in  that  very  spot  a  woman,  Utna,  very 
beautiful  and  of  golden  hue.  daughter  of  Himavat.  He 
said  to  her  "  What  is  this  (rreat  Spirit  ?"  (25) 

Com. — Atha,  etc.,  has  already  been  explained. 
Iiidra^  lord  of  the  Devaa,  Mwjhavan,  (being  the  most 
^)Owerfi]l  of  them)  said  yes,  and  lan  to  That.  But  That 
vanished  from  his  sight,  when  he  was  near  the  Br<ih- 
7Mvn  and  did  not  even  talk  to  him,  because  it  wished 
to  crush  altogether  his  j)ride  at  being  Indra.  In  the 
very  spot  where  the  Spirit  showed  itself  and  from  wiiich 


WITH  SKI  SANKAKA  .S   COMMKNTAKV.  /  T 

it  vanished  and  near  the  place  where  ladra  was  at  tlie- 
nioment  the  Bi'nhnn<m  vanished,  hulra  stood  diseuss- 
in»;-  within  himself  what  that  Sjurit  was,  and  did  not 
return  like  A(/ni  and  Vayu.  Seeinj^;  his  attachment 
to  that  Spirit,  knowIed<>e  in  the  form  of  a  woman  and 
of  Uriui  a})})eared  before  him.  Iitdra  beheld  know- 
ledge, fairest  of  the  fair, — this  ejuthet  is  very  a]»])ro- 
])riate  in  the  particular  context — as  if  adonied  in  yold. 
Himavatifit^  may  mean  '  the  dau<;hter  of  HiinaUiya,^ 
and  beino-  ever  associated  witli  the  T^ord  (Sivc)  the 
omniscient,  and  havin<;-  approached  her,  asked  :  '"  Who 
is  this  Spiiit  that  showed  itself  and  vanished  ?" 


Here  ends  the  Third  Pai-t, 


Kciiopaiu^ha^. 


FOURTH    PART. 

f^%\^TJr  sTflfcT  II  \\  II 
She  said  "  It  is  Brahtiudt  indeed.     Attain     ijloiy  in 
the  victory  of  Br<ikiti<in.  "      From  her    words  only,   he 
learned  that  it  was  Brdhinan.  (26) 

Com. — The  particle  '  H<i, '  means  '  verily.'  (xlory 
in  the  victory  of  the  omnipotent  TiOrd  (for  the  Asnvds 
were  defeated  only  by  BrdhitKin).  Et(ft  modifies  the 
predicate.  Vonr  notion  that  the  victory  and  the  i;lorv 
are  yours  is  false.  From  her  words  alone /n(/)v<  h'arned 
that  it  was  Br<ihm((n.  The  force  of  '  only  *  is  that 
Iiidva  did  not  know  of  himself. 

5IT^T^  T^?!^^  5I^c!T?Tm  f^T^-Tir  s^KiT^  \\  ^.vs  II 

These    Jk'V'is     A(/iii.      Vayit     and      /iidra   thei(>fore 

much  excel  others,  because  they  touched  the  lirtdtiudH 

nearest.      They  it  was  who  tiist  knew     the  Sjiirit  to  he 

Brdknidu.  ("27) 


WITH  SKI  .sankara's  commkntaky.  79 

Goni. — Because  these  Devds,  A<jni,  Vayit  and  Indnv 
jq)[)roac*lied  the  BvdhiMin  nearest  by  conversinfj  with 
and  seeing-  That,  they  surpass  the  otiiers  considerably 
in  the  uiattei- of  power,  (juality  and  affluence.  The 
particle  '  Iva  '  either  has  no  nieaninj;-  or  has  the  force 
of  •  certainly.'  Because  these  J)ev«8,  Aijiii,  Fcfif/Jt  and 
Iiiili'd  apjtroached  nearest  the  most  desirable  Bi'dhmau, 
by  such  means  as  the  conversation  aforesaid,  and  be- 
cause they  were  the  fiist  who  knew  the  Bralmian^ 
they  are  foremost. 

Therefore  also  does  liidrn  considerably  excel  other 
DevdS  because  he  apjtroached  Brahtimii  nearest  atid 
b.'cause  he  first  kn<»w  the  Sj>irit  to  be  Brdhiimn.     (28) 

Coia. — Because  even  At/iii  and  Voi/it.  knew  Brnh- 
nian  from  the  words  of  Iiulva  and  lx»cause  Iiuira  first 
heard  of  the  Brahinaa  from  the  words  of  Uma,  there- 
fore does  liidvd  so  excel  the  other  Devas.  He 
approached  Brnhiivin  nearest  because  he  was  first  who 
knew  the  Brahinan. 


80  KKNOPAMSHAD. 

Tims  is  That  inculcatwl  liy  illustration — that  it 
flashed  like  liohtnino- — that  it  appeared  and  vanislied 
as  the  eye  winketh.  This  is  the  illustration  of  the 
Brahman  used  in  respect  to  the  Devas.  (29) 

Com. — Of  the  Brahman  the  subject  discussed,  this^ 
is  the  Adesa.  Adesa  is  instruction  by  means  of  illus- 
trations. The  illustration  liy  which  the  Brahman, 
the  like  of  which  does  not  exist,  is  explained  is  said  to- 
be  its  Adesa.  What  is  It  ?  That  which  is  well-known 
in  the  world  as  the  flash  of  liohtnino-.  To  add  '  krita- 
vat '  is  inconsistent.  Therefoie  we  understand  it  to 
mean  '  the  flash  of  liohtnino'.  The  jjarticle  'A  '  means 
'  like.'  The  meaning  is  '  like  the  flash  of  liohtnino-.' 
We  find  another  Smti  sayino-  '  As  if  a  liohtnino- 
flashed.'  It  just  showed  itself  to  the  Devas  like  lioht- 
ning  and  vanished  from  their  view — or  the  word  '  Tejas' 
[bright]  should  be  supplied  after  '  Vidyutah  '  [of  lioht- 
ning].  The  meaning  then  is  that  It  shone  for  a  mo- 
ment like  a  dazzling  flasli  of  lightning.  The  word 
*  iti  '  shows  that  it  is  an  illustration.  The  word  '  ith  ' 
is  used  in  the  sense  of  and  '  or  *  else  '.  This  is  another 
illustration  of  it.  What  is  it  ?  It  winked  as  the 
eye  winks.  The  "iiich  suftix  lias  no  distinct  mean- 
ing from    the  meaning    of  the  root.     The    particle '«  ^ 


WITH    SRI    SANKAKA'S    COMMENTARY.  81 

means  '  like  '.  The  meaning  is  that  it  was  like  the 
eye  opening  and  closing-  to  see  and  to  turn  from  its 
objects.  This  illustration  of  the  Brahman  is  taken 
from  tlie  activity  of  the  deities. 

«^T:  II  ^o  II 
Next  illustration,  from  the  Atvum  within  tiie  Ixxly — 
as  speedily  as  the  mind  goes  to  Brahinan — as  speedily 
as    one    thinks  of  Bralmiati    by    the    mind,    and    as 
speedily  as  the  mind  wills.  (30) 

CoTti. — '  AtJm  '  means  '  next '.  We  offer  illustra- 
tions from  the  Atnwn  within  the  liody.  '  Goes  to  * 
means  '  perceives  as  an  object'.  As  speedily  as  one 
(worshipper)  thinks  of  the  Brahinan  as  near.  '  Ahhik- 
shnam '  means  '  very  much'.  '  Wills',  i.  e.,  about  the 
Brahman.  By  the  volition,  recollection  of  the  mind^ 
the  Brahm,an  as  bounded  by  the  mind  is  jierceived  as 
an  object.  Therefore  this  is  an  illustration  of  the 
Brahman  taken  from  within  the  body,  as  lightning 
and  winking  from  the  activity  of  the  j)owers.  And  as 
those  illustrations  show  that  Brahimin  flashes  instan- 
taneously, so  these  illustmtions  show  that  Brahman^a 
appearance  and  disai)pearance  aiv  as  quick  as  the  per- 
ceptions   of    the    mind.      These    illustrations    of    the 

6 


82  KENOPANISHAD. 

Brahrtuin  are  oiven  because  it  can  be  understood  by 
dull  persons  only  if  so  illustrated.  It  is  well-known  that 
the  unconditioned  Brahman  can  be  known  by  persons 
of  inferior  intellect. 

The  Brahrtuin  should  be  worshipped  by  all  and 
is  hence  called  Tadvana.  As  Tadvana,  It  must  be 
worshipped.  Who  thus  knows  Brahman,  is  loved  by 
alljiving  beings.  (31) 

Com. — '  TaV  means  '  Brahman\  '  Ha^  means  *  as 
is  well-known'.  '  Tadvanam '  is  a  compound  of  tat  and 
vamim.  It  means  '  which  deserves  to  be  worshipped 
as  the  one  Atman  of  all  livin<>-  thinfjs'.  The  Brahman 
is  well-known  as  Tadvanam  and  should,  therefore,  be 
worslnpped  as  Tadvana,  a  word  (hMiotint--  its  virtue. 
*  Worshi])j)ed'  means  '  contemplated.'  The  Smii  next 
declares  the  fruit  attained  by  one  who  contemplates 
the  Brahiiuin  by  this  name.  He  who  contemplates 
the  Brahman  already  defined  as  possessed  of  this 
virtue,  him  (this  worshipper)  all  living  things  love,  i.e., 
l)ray  to  him  as  they  would  to  Brahman. 

Thus  instructed,  the  disci]>le  addressed  the  preceptor 
m  tJie  following  manner. 


WITH  SKI  sankaka's  commextaky.  83 

^rT  II  \'<  II 

(The  disciple).  (()  Preceptor  1)  "Teach  ine  the 
Upanishid".  (The  preceptor).  "  We  liave  told  thee  the 
Upanishml."  We  liave  certainly  told  thee  the 
Upanishad  about  Brdhnyin.''  (32) 

Cmn. — When  the  disciple  said  "  ( )  holy  one  I  Teach 
me  the  secret  that  should  be  tliout>ht  of,"  the  preceptor 
replied  "  the  Upanisfuul  has  l>een  tauo;]it  thee."  ''What 
is  that  UpduifihadT  The  jjreceptor  replied  "  Tiie 
Updnislmd  treating  of  BrnJmian,  the  sui)reine  Self,  has 
been  tau<;;ht  thee  who  excel  in  knowledge".  The  latter 
half  is  intrtxiuced  for  decisively  assertin^j  that  the  know- 
ledi^e  of  the  su])renie  Praniatttian,  the  Brdhiiinn 
already  explained,  is  the  Upauishad.  Now  what  is  the 
real  significance  of  the  disciple,  wlio  has  already'  heard, 
explained  to  him,  the  knowledge  of  the  5)vf/tmrni,  ask- 
ing the  preceptor  to  tell  him  the  Upanishdd  ?  If  the 
(juestion  was  about  what  was  already  explained,  then 
the  question  itself  beconies  redundant  and  meaningless 
like  Pishtapeahdna.  If,  however,  the  Upanishad  had 
been  only  })artially  explained,  then  the  concluding  it  by 
reciting  its  fruits  :      '*  Having  turned   away   from    this 


84  KENOPANISHAD. 

world  they  become  immortal,"  is  not  reasonable. 
Therefore,  the  question,  if  asked  about  the  unexplained 
portion  of  the  Upanishad  is  also  unsound,  because  there 
was  no  }>ortion  yet  to  be  explained.  What  then  is  the 
nieanin^i^  of  the  questioner.  We  answer  thus  :  The 
disciple  meant  to  say  :  "  Does  the  Upanishad  already 
explained  stand  in  need  of  anythinjT  else  which  should 
combine  with  it  to  secure  the  desired  end,  or  does  it 
not  stand  in  need  of  any  such  thing  ?  If  it  does,  teach 
me  the  Upanishad  aliout  what  is  so  required.  If  it 
does  not,  assert  emphatically  like  Pippalada  in  the 
words — There  is  nothinj?  beyond  this — ."  The  precep- 
tor's emphatical  assertion,  "  The  Upanishad  has  been 
told  thee"  is  but  proper.  It  may  be  said  that  this 
cannot  be  construed  as  an  emphatic  assertion,  as  al- 
ready explained,  for  somethin<T  yet  had  to  be  said  by 
the  preceptor.  It  is  true  that  the  j)recei)tor  adds 
'  Tasyi ',  etc.,  but  that  is  not  added  as  a  portion  com- 
biniufj  with  the  Upanishad,  already  exi)lained,  in  ac- 
complishinj:;  the  desired  end,  nor  as  a  distinct  aid  for 
achieving  the  end  with  the  Upanishad,  but  as  some- 
thing intended  as  a  means  to  the  acquisition  of  the 
knowledge  of  the  Brahman  ;  for,  tapas,  etc.,  are 
apparently  of  the  same  importance  with  the   Vedas  and 


WITH    SKI    SANKAKA'S   COMMENTARY.  85 

their  supplements,  beinj^  mentioned  alon^  with  them. 
It  is  well  known  that  neither  tlie  Vedfis  nor  the  suj)- 
plements  are  the  direct  complements  of  the  knowledge 
of  the  Brahman  or  concomitant  helps  to  it.  It  is 
urged  that  it  is  only  reasonable  to  assign  different 
offices  according  to  merit,  even  to  many  mentioned  in 
the  same  breath.  Just  as  the  'uuintras  for  invoking 
the  gods,  where  more  than  one  is  named,  are  used  to 
j)erform  the  function  of  different  deities  according  as 
the  god  to  be  invoked  is  this  or  that ;  it  is  urged  it  is 
to  be  inferred  that  tapas,  jjeace,  karma,  truth,  etc., 
are  either  complements  or  concomitant  heljis  to  the 
knowledge  of  Brahman^  and  that  the  Vedas  and  tlieir 
sup])lements,  elucidating  meanings,  are  only  helps  to 
the  knowledge  of  Karma  and  Atma.  They  urge  that 
this  distribution  is  only  reasonable  from  the  reason- 
ableness of  the  applicability  of  their  puri)ort  to  this 
distribution.  This  cannot  be,  for  it  is  illogical.  This 
distinction  is  im})Ossible  to  bring  aliout.  It  is  unrea- 
sonable to  think  that  the  knowledge  of  tlie  Brahraan^ 
before  which  all  notions  of  distinctions  of  deed,  doer, 
fruit,  etc.,  vanish,  can  i>ossibly  require  any  extraneous 
thing  as  its  comj)lement  or  concomitant  aid  in  accom- 
]ilishing  it.     Xor  can  its  fruit,   emancipation,   require 


86  KENOPANISHAD. 

any  such.  It  is  said  :  "  One  desirous  of  emancipation 
should  always  renounce  kmmia  and  all  its  aids.  It  is 
only  by  one  that  so  renounces  tliat  the  hij^hest  place 
(can  be  reached). 

Therefore,  knowledge  cannot  consistently  witli  itself 
require  JairTiUt  as  its  concomitant  heli)  or  its  comple- 
ment. Therefore,  the  distribution  on  the  analogy  of  the 
invocation  in  Suktavaha  is  certainly  unsound.  There- 
fore, it  is  soimd  to  say  that  the  question  and  answer  were 
intended  only  to  make  sure.  The  meaning  is  ''  what 
was  explained  is  all  the  Upanishad,  which  does  not 
require    anything  else  for  ensuring  emancipation." 

cT^  cTtr  ^:  ^%]qf%5T  ^^:  ^WT^  H?^«n?TcRq:H  XX  » 

Devotion,  self-control  and  Karitia  are  its  pedes- 
tal, as  also  the  Vedas  and  their  sui)plements.  Truth  is 
its  abode.  (33) 

Goni. — Of  the  Upanishad  about  Brahman  which  has 
been  already  taught,  devotion,  etc.,  are  helps  to  the 
acquisition.  '  Tapas^  means,  'control  of  the  body,  the 
sensory  organs  and  the  mind.'  '  Dania '  means  '  freedom 
from  passions.'  '  Karma '  is  A(jnihotra,  etc.  It  has  been 
seen  that  knowledge  of  the  Brahiuaa  arises  indirectly 
tlirougli  the  purification  of  tlie  mind  in  the  perscni,  who 
has  l^en  retiiied   by  these.      Encu  when  Brahman    is 


WITH    SHI    SANKAKA's   COMMENTARY.  87 

explained,  those  who  have  not  been  purtijed  of  their 
faults,  either  disbelieve  or  misbelieve  in  it,  as  in  the 
cases  of  Itulra,  Virochiiia,  etc.  Therefore,  knowledge 
as  inculcated  arises  only  in  him  who  has,  i>y  tapas, 
etc.,  performed  either  in  this  birth  or  in  many  previous 
ones,  purified  his  mind.  The  Snit!  says  :  "  To  that  high- 
souled  man  whose  devotion  to  the  Ix>rd  is  great  and 
whose  devotion  to  his  preceptor  is  as  great  as  that  to  the 
liOrd,  these  secrets  explained  become  illuminated."  The 
SmHti  says  :  "Knowledge  arises  in  men  bj^  annihilation 
of  sinful  deeds."  The  word  '  iii  '  is  used  to  show  that 
the  mention  of  tapas,  etc.,  is  only  by  way  of  illustration; 
for  it  will  show  that  there  are  other  aids  than  those 
mentioned  to  the  acijuisition  of  knowledge,  as  freedom 
from  pride,  hatred  of  })omp,  etc.  '  Pratishta  '  means 
'  legs.'  For,  when  they  exist,  knowledge  is  firmly 
seated  j  ust  as  a  person  goes  about  with  his  legs,  the 
four  Vedaa,  all  the  six  sujiplements,  i.e.,  SikaJui,  etc. 
The  Veclas  being  the  enlighteners  of  the  knowledge  of 
karma  and  the  supplementary  scriptures  being  intended 
for  their  protection  are  called  '  legs '  of  the  knowledge 
of  BrahnKtn.  Or  the  word  ^Pratishta'  having  been 
construed  as  /ej/8,  the  Veclas  nuist  be  understood  as  all 
other  parts  of  the  body  than  the  legs,  such  as  the  head, 


S8  KENOPANISHAD. 

«tc.  In  this  case  it  should  be  understood  that  in  tlie 
mention  of  Vedas,  the  Angas,  siksha,  etc.,  are  in  effect 
mentioned.  \Mien  the  trunk  [cingt]  is  mentioned,  the 
limbs  \_angas]  are  included  ;  because  the  limbs  live 
in  the  trunk.  The  place  where  the  Upanishad  rests 
is  Truth.  '  Satyam '  (Truth)  means  '  freedom  from 
deceit  and  fraud  in  speech,  mind  or  deed';  for  knowledge 
seeks  those  who  are  good-natured  and  free  from  deceit 
and  not  men  of  the  nature  of  the  Asuras  and  the  deceit- 
ful ;  for,  the  Sruti  says :  '  Not  in  whom  there  is  fraud, 
falsehood  or  deceit.'  Therefore,  it  is  said  that  Truth  is 
the  resting  place  of  knowledge.  The  mention  again  of 
Truth  as  the  resting  i)lace  of  knowledge,  notwithstanding 
its  im})lied  mention  as  '  the  leg  on  which  knowledge 
stands '  along  with  devotion,  etc.,  is  to  indicate  that 
Truth  excels  others  as  a  help  to  knowledge  ;  for,  the 
Smriti  says  :  "  If  a  thousand  Asvamedha  sacrifices  and 
Truth  were  weighed  in  the  balance,  one  Truth  s])oken 
will  outweigli  the  thousand  sacrifices." 

^I  ^m^^  ^<N^^    TT'^JTIR?^    ^if    ^t%   ^1    VfJ^- 

fcTSm  STfcTfcT^fcT  II  \^  II 

He  who  knows  this  thus,  having  shaken  off  all 
sin,  lives  firmly  seated  in  the  endless,  blissful  and 
highest  Brdlmian.     He  li\es  firmly  seated.  (.34) 


WITH  SRI  s Ankara's  commentary.  89 

Com. — *  This'  means  '  the  knowledge  of  Brahman 
as  exj)lained  in  *  kene8hita7)i\  etc.,  and  higlily  eulogised 
in  the  text  '  Brahmaha  Devehhyo"  etc.,  and  the 
source  of  all  knowledge.  Although  it  has  been  already 
said  that  by  such  knowledge  one  attains  immortality, 
the  fruit  of  the  knowledge  of  Brahman  is  again  state<^l 
at  the  end.  '  Sin  '  means  '  the  seed  o{  Samaara  whose 
nature  is  ignorance,  desire  and  karma.''  *  Anant^ 
means  '  boundless.'  *  Svan/e  loke '  means  '  in  the 
Brahman  wlio  is  all  bliss'  and  not  *  in  heaven  because 
of  the  adjunct  '  boundless.'  It  may  be  said  that  the 
word  '  boundless '  is  used  in  its  secondary  sense.  There- 
fore the  Sruti  adds  :  '  Jyeye,'  '  highest  of  all.'  The 
purjjort  is  that  he  is  firmly  seated  in  the  imconditioned 
Brahman,  i.e.,  does  not  again  revert  to  Samsara 
{worldly  existence]. 

Thus  ends  the  Commentary  of  Sri  Sankara  Charya. 


Thus  ends  tlie  Upanishad. 


illunOakopauislia^, 


Sri  Sankara's  Introduction. 


OM   TAT  SAT. 

— o 

Adoration  to  the  Brahman.  The  mantra  beginnings 
with  ^' Brafwia  Devana7n"  is  one  of  t\u^  Atharvana 
Upanishads.  The  Upanishad  at  its  ^•ery  commence- 
ment sajvS  how  tlie  knowledge  therein  contained  was 
transmitted  from  i)receptor  to  disciple  and  does  this 
for  the  purj)ose  of  praising  it.  By  showing  how  and 
with  what  great  labom*  this  knowledge  was  acquired  b)' 
great  sages  as  a  means  to  secure  the  highest  consum- 
mation, it  extols  knowledge  to  create  a  taste  for  it, 
in  the  minds  of  the  hearers  ;  for,  it  is  only  when  a 
taste  for  knowledge  is  created  by  jnaising  it,  they 
would  eagerly  seek  to  ac(juire  it.  Kow  this  knowledge 
is  related  to  emancipation,  as  a  means  to  its  end,  will 
be  subse(juently  e.x})laine(l  in  the  passages  commencing 
with  '  Bliidyate,'  etc.  Having  first  stated  here  that  the 
knowledge,  denoted  by  the  word  "  Apara  Vidya'"  such 


WITH  siu  sankaha's  commp:ntahy.  91 

as  Rif)  Veda,  etc.,  and  coiisistint;  merely  of  luandatory 
and  prohibitory  injunctions,  cannot  remove  faults  like 
ignorance,  etc.,  which  are  the  cause  of  Sdraaara,  i.e., 
embodied  existence  and  having,  by  the  passages  bejjin- 
ning  with  "  Avidyayam  aiitar  vartamami",  etc.^ 
shown  a  (marked)  division  of  Vidya  into  Para  and 
Apara,  it  explains  in  the  i)assat'es  befjinnin*:;  with 
'  Parikshya  lokan,*  etc.,  the  knowled«j;e  of  Brahman 
(Brahinavidya)  which  is  a  means  to  the  attainment 
of  the  hiohest  (Para)  and  which  can  be  attained  only 
by  the  j^race  of  the  preceptor,  after  a  renunciation  of 
the  desire  for  all  objects  whether  as  means  or  ends.  It 
also  declares  often  the  fruits  of  this  knowledge  in  the 
passajies  "  He  who  knows  Brahruan  \w'Couws  Brahman 
itself "  and  ''  Havin«^  become  Brahman  while  yet 
alive,  all  are  freed."  Although  knowled«i;e  is  permitted 
to  all  in  any  order  of  life,  it  is  the  knowledge  of 
Brahman  in  a  Sanuyasiii  that  becomes  the  means  of 
emancii)ation  ;  not  the  knowledt;e  combined  with 
karmn.  This  is  shown  by  such  passages  as  "  living 
the  life  of  a  mendicant "  and  "  Being  in  the  ortler  of 
the  Sttnnyas'ln"  etc.  This  also  follows  from  the  anta- 
gonism between  knowledge  and  kaiina  ;  it  is  well- 
known    to   be    impossible  that    the  knowledge  of  the 


92  MUNDAKOPAMSHAD. 

identity  of  self  with  Brahman  can  be  made  to  co-exist, 
even  in  a  dream  with  kavnui  (i.e.,  action).  Knowledge 
bein<;  independent  of  time  and  not  being  the  effect  of 
definite  causes  cannot  be  limited  by  time. 

If  it  be  suggested  that  knowledge  and  karma  can 
possibly  co-exist  as  indicated  by  the  fact  that  sages  in 
the  house-holder's  order  have  lianded  down  knowledge, 
we  say  that  this  mere  indication  (linga)  cannot  over- 
ride an  obvious  fact ;  for  the  co-existence  of  Hght  and 
darkness  cannot  be  brought  about  even  by  a  hundred 
rules,  mucli  less  by  mere  indications  (linga)  like  these. 
A  short  commentary  is  now  commenced  of  the  Upani- 
shad,  whose  relation  to  the  end  desired  and  wliose  result 
have  been  thus  pointed  out.  This  is  named  Upanishad; 
it  may  be  either  because  it  lessens  the  numerous  evils 
of  conception,  birth,  old  age,  disease,  etc.,  in  })ersons  who 
take  kindly  to  this  knowledge  of  Brahman  and  a]»proach 
it  with  faith  and  devotion ;  or,  because  it  makes  them 
reach  Brahman  ;  or,  because  it  totally  destroys  the  cause 
of  Samsara,  such  as  ignorance,  etc.;  thus  from  the  several 
meanings  of  the  root  shad  preceded  by  upani. 

'St  I  ^5iT  ^^Ht  5m»T:  ^^^  f^^?E[^T  -^^m  mm  I 


WITH  SKI  saxkaka's  commextaky.  93 

Brdhnia  was  tlie  first  anion<^  the  Devas,  the  creator  of 
the  universe,  the  protector  of  tlie  world.  He  taught 
the  knowled«;e  of  Brdhnian,  on  which  all  knowledn;e 
rests,  to  his  eldest  son  Atluirva.  (1) 

Com. — Tlie  word  '^BrdhiiKi  "  means  "  much  jjrown," 
"  ^reat",  as  excelling;  all  others  in  virtue,  knowledge, 
freedom  from  desires  and  powei-.  The  word  Devaaam 
means  Iiidr<i  and  others,  literally,  those  iKJssessinjr 
'■  enlightenment."  The  word  'Pratharna'  means  "pre- 
eminent by  attributes "  or  '*  at  first."  Sdrabdhhuva 
means  "  became  manifest  well,"  i.e.,  of  free  choice 
not  like  mortals  wiio  are  born  in  Sftmaara,  in  conse- 
quence of  their  "ood  and  bad  deeds;  for,  the  SmHH 
says  '*  He  who  is  beyond  the  reach  of  the  senses  and 
cannot  lie  ^rasjw^d,  etc."  Vhvdsya  means  ''  of  the 
whole  miiverse.  "  Juirta,  '  creator  ';  Bhavanasya,  '  of 
the  world '  so  created  ;  gopta,  '  protector  ';  the  epithets 
for  Brahma  are  for  eulo<(isinp;  the  knowled<i;e.  He,  i.e., 
Brahnui  whose  oreatness  is  tlius  celebrated.  Brahnui 
Vidymn,  '  knowledoe  of  the  Brahnuin  or  the  Para- 
matrnafi'  because  it  is  described  as  knowledoe  '  by 
which  one  knows  the  undecayinji;  and  the  true  Pnrasha*; 
that  knowledjre  is  of  the  Paramatman ;  or  Brahma 
vidya    may   mean   "  knowledge   taught    by    Brahma 


^4  MUNDAKOPANISHAD. 

the  first  born."  Sarva  vidya  pratishtam  means 
"that  on  whicli  all  knowledge  rests  for  support"; 
because  it  is  the  cause  of  the  manifestation  of 
all  other  knowledge ;  or,  it  may  be,  because  the  one 
entity  to  be  cognized  by  all  knowledge  is  only  known 
by  this  ;  for  the  Smti  says  "  by  which,  what  is  not  heard 
becomes  heard  ;  what  is  not  thought  of  l^ecomes  thought 
■of;  and  what  is  not  known  becomes  known."  The 
■expression  "  on  which  all  knowledge  depends"  is  also 
eulogy.  He  taught  this  knowledge  to  his  eldest  son  ; 
as  Atharva  was  created  at  the  beginning,  in  one  of  the 
numerous  creations  made  by  Brahma,  he  is  said  to  be 
his  eldest  son.      To  him.  his  eldest  son.  he   taught. 

^  -i^T^^n  ^^^^^^^  vm  *rTrg[T^sff  ?%  q?-T^nqi  ii  ^  ii 

That  knowledge  oi  Brahtiiaii  which  Brahnia  taught 
to  Atharva,  Atharva  taught  to  An/jira  in  ancient 
days  ;  and  he  taught  it  to  one  of  the  Bhtradvaja 
family  by  name  Satyavaha  ;  and  Satyavaha  taught  to 
AiMjiras  the  knowledge  so  descended  from  the  greater 
to  the  less.  (2) 

Com. — That  knowledge  of  Brahvtaii,  which  Brahma 
taught  to  Atharva,  the  same  knowledge  thus  accpiired 
fronj  Brahtua,  Atharva  iu  ancient  <iavs  t»iught    to  one 


WITH    SKI    SANKARA'S    COMMENTARY.  95 

named  Anr/ih  ;  and  this  Angih  tau^^lit  it  to  one 
named  Sfityavdha  of  tlie  line  of  the  Bhanvdvaja  ;  and 
Bharadvaja  taught  it  to  Angiraa,  his  disciple  or  his 
son.  Paravaram,  because  it  was  acquired  from 
sujierior  by  inferior  saji^es  ;  or,  because  it  permeates  the 
subject  of  all  knowled<>;e,  ^reat  and  small  ;  the  term 
Praha,  i.  e.,  tdii/jld  should  be  read  into  the  last  clause. 

^;T5r  ^^i^  f^^r^  ^kT^i  mrrt  ^'Rfrnr  w  \\\ 

S(vivna/c(i,  a  fjreat  (jrihdsta,  having  duly  approached 
Awjiras,  (juestioned  him  "  What  is  that,  ()  BlKU/avtui 
which  beino-  known,  all  this  becomes  known."  (3) 

Com. — Sdunaka,  the  male  issue  of  Stinaka.  Malui' 
salah  means  "  the  g^reat  house-holder";  Awjiras,  i.e., 
the  disciple  of  Bhdvadvdja  and  his  own  preceptor  ; 
Yidhivat  means  '  duly  ';  i.e.,  accordin<;  to  the  aastras  ; 
Upasmi^uih  means  *  having;  approache^l ';  PapiHichha 
means  '  questioned  ';  from  **  the  appt'cxtcliin/j  didy" 
mentioned  just  after  the  connection  l^tween  Siiunaka 
and  Am/iras,  it  should  be  inferred  that  in  res})ect  of 
the  manner  of  approaching,  there  was  no  established 
rule  among  the  ancients,  before  him.  The  attribute 
"  duly"  might  have  been  intended  either  to  fix  a  limit, 
or    to  api)ly   to  all   alike,  on  the  analogy    of   a  lamp 


90  MUNDAKOPANISHAD. 

placed  amidst  a  house  ;  for  the  rule  about  '*  the  manner 
of  approach  in  o"  is  intended  in  the  case  of  persons  like 
us  also.  What  did  he  say  ?  "  What  is  that  ?  Oh 
Bha/javan,  etc."  The  particle  nu  exjn-esses  doubt. 
Bhfigavo  means  '  0  Bhagavan.'  "  All  this"  means 
"  everything;  knowable."  Vijiuttam  means  '  specially 
known  or  understood.'  [Oh  Bhagavan  what  is 
that  which  being  known  everythinij  knowable 
becomes  well-known].  Saunaka  havino-  heard 
the  sayino;  of  good  men  that  "  when  one  is 
known,  he  becomes  the  knower  of  all,"  and  being  de- 
sirous of  knowing  that  one  in  j)artieular,  asked  in 
doubt  '"  what  is  that,  etc.";  or,  having  seen  merely  from 
a  pojiular  view,  questioned.  There  are  in  the  world 
varieties  of  pieces  of  gold,  etc.,  which,  though  different 
are  known  by  people  in  the  world  by  the  knowledge  of 
the  unity  of  the  substance  (gold,  etc.);  similarly  *'  Is 
there  one  cause  of  all  the  varieties  in  the  world,  which 
cause  being  known,  all  will  be  well-known  ?"  It  may  be 
said  that  when  the  existence  of  the  thing  is  not  known, 
the  question  "  what  is  that,  etc.,"  is  not  appropriate 
and  the  question  in  the  form  "  is  there,  etc.,"  would 
then  be  ai)propriate  ;  if  the  existence  is  established,  the 
(question    may  well    be '' what  is  that,  etc.,"  as  in   the 


WITH  SKI  SANKAKA'S  COMMENTARY.  97 

ex])ression,  "  With  whom  shall  it  be  deposited."  The 
objection  is  unsound ;  the  question  in  this  form  is 
appropriate  from  fear  of  troublinfj  b}-  verbosity. 

To  liim  he  said  "  There  are  two  sorts  of  knowledge  to 
he  ac(piired.  So  those  who  know  the  Brahiium  say  ; 
namely,  Para  and  Apara,  i.e.,  the  hifrher  and  the 
lower.  (4) 

Co7)t. — Awjiraa  said  to  Sauwika.  What  did  he 
say  ?  (He  said)  that  there  were  two  sorts  of  know- 
led^^e  to  be  known.  So  indeed,  do  those  who  know  the 
import  of  the  Vedds  and  who  see  the  absolute  truths 
say  what  these  two  sorts  are  ;  lie  says  :  Para  is  the 
knowledge  of  the  Parcmudman  and  Apara  is  that 
which  deals  with  the  means  and  the  results  of  good 
and  bad  actions.  It  may  be  asked  how,  having  to  say 
what  it  was  that  Siiunaka  asked  aI)out  in  the  question 
— "  What  being  known  one  becomes  omniscient,'' 
Aiigiras  stated  what  he  was  not  asked  about,  by  the 
passage  ''  there  are  two  sorts  of  knowledge,  etc."  This 
is  no  fjivilt  ;  for  the  reply  requires  this  order  of  state- 
ment.    Ayara  vidya  is  ignorance  and  tliat     ought  to 

7 


98  MUNDAKOPANISHAD. 

be  dispelled.  When  what  is  known  is  Apara  vidya, 
i.  e.,  the  subject  of  ignorance,  nothing  can  be  known 
as  it  is.  The  rule  is  that  after  thus  refuting  the  faulty 
theory,  the  true  conclusion  should  be  stated. 

d^lMil  ^5r>^  ?r5t^:   HTJT%fTS^%?r:    f?!^    %^^\   £?TT^?!i 

Of  these,  the  Apara  is  the  Rig  Veda,  the  Yajur 
Veda,  the  Sama  Veda,  and  the  Atharva  Veda,  the 
siksha,  the  code  of  rituals,  grammar,  niruJda,  chhan- 
das  and  astrology.  Then  the  para,  is  that  by  which 
the  immortal  is  known.  ^  (5) 

Com. —  Of  these,  what  Apara  vidya  is,  is  explained. 
Rig  Veda,  Yajur  Veda,  Samia  Veda,  and  the  Atharva 
Veda,  these  four  Vedas,  the  siksha,  the  code  of  rituals, 
grammar,  niriihta,  chhandas  and  astrology,  these  six 
angas  (of  Vedas),  all  this  is  knowledge  called  Apara  ; 
now,  knowledge  called  Para  is  explained.  It  is  that 
by  which  the  "  immortal "  as  hereafter  described  is 
reached  ;  for,  the  root//rM/fc,  with  adhi  before  it,  generally 
means  reach.  Nor  is  the  attainment  of  the  highest, 
different  from  the  sense  of  knowledge.  The  attainment 
of  the  highest  is  merely  the  removal  of  ignorance.  They 


WITH    SHI    SANKAHA'S    COMMENTARY.  99 

mean  the  same  tliin;;-.  It  may  he  asked  how  that  Vidya 
could  be  called  jj<tr(t  and  a  help  to  emancipation,  if  such 
Vidyahe  excluded  by  the  Rifj  Vedft,,  etc  ;  for,  the  Sniriti 
says  "  Tliose  Sntritis  whicli  are  excluded  by  the  Vedas, 
etc."  It  will  become  unacce})table.  because  it  sees 
wroni'ly  and  leads  to  no  "oofl  results  ;  and  a<i^ain  the 
Upanishads  will  become  excluded  by  the  Rif/  Veda,  etc., 
but  if  they  are  included  in  the  J{i(j  Veda,  etc.,  a 
se])arate  classification  is  useless.  How  then  can  it  be 
called  para  ?  The  objection  has  no  force;  for  by  the  tenn 
"  Vidya"  is  liere  meant  the  knoidedije  of  a  subject ; 
by  the  term  "  Para  vidya  "  is  meant  primarily  in  this 
context,  that  knowledge  of  the  immortal  which  could 
be  known  throuo^h  the  Upanishads  and  not  the  mei^e 
assemblage  of  woi'ds  in  them ;  but  by  the  term  vidya 
is  always  understood  the  assembla<^e  of  words  forming 
it.  As  the  immortal  cannot  be  realised  by  a  mere 
mastery  of  the  assemblaoe  of  words  without  other 
efforts,  such  as  the  approaching-  a  preceptor  and  spurn- 
ino-  all  desires,  etc.,  the  separate  classification  of  the 
knowledge  of  Brahitvui  and  its  designation  as  Para 
vidya  are  proper. 

fJT?t  ra^  ^^ct  5»1^'^  cT^e^^  q^rcT^fTfJT  MUMV^Prl  WT:  \\\\\ 


100  MUNDAKOPANISHAD. 

That  which  cannot  be  perceived,  which  cannot  be 
seized,  wliich  has  no  origin,  which  has  no  properties, 
which  has  neither  ear  nor  eye,  whicli  lias  neither  hands 
nor  feet,  which  is  eternal,  diversely  manifested, 
all-pervading,  extremely  subtle,  and  undecaying.  which 
the  intelligent  cognized  as  the  source  of  the  Bhutas.   (6) 

Com. — As  in  the  matter  of  an  injunction  (vidhA) 
there  is  something  to  he  done,  as  of  the  nature  of 
Agnihotra,  etc.,  subsequent  to  the  realization  of  its 
import,  with  tlie  aid  of  many  requisites  (kavdka),  such 
as  the  doer,  etc.,  there  is  nothing  liere  to  be  done  in  the 
matter  of  the  knowledge  of  the  Brahman .  Jt  is  accom- 
plished simultaneously  with  the  realization  of  the  im])ort 
of  the  text ;  for,  there  is  nothing  here  except  being- 
centred  in  the  knowledge  revealed  by  mere  words. 
Therefore,  the  Para  vidya  is  here  ex])laine(l  with 
reference  to  Brahniaoi,  as  described  in  the  text  "  that 
whicli  cannot  be  perceived,  etc.";  what  is  to  be  exjilained 
is  realized  in  the  mind  and  referred  to,  as  what  is 
already  known  by  the  expression  "  that  which"  ; 
Adresya'ni  means  '  that  cannot  be  perceived',  invisible. 
i.  e..  beyond  the  reach  of  all  the  intellectual  senses  ; 
for,  vision  externally  directed  is  the  medium  for  the 
working  of  the  five  senses.     Agrahyain   means    '  that 


WITH    SKI    S ANKARA'S   COMMENTARY.  101 

cannot  be  seized,'  i.e.,  not  an  object  for  the  or<j^an.s  of 
action,  (rofrrw/imeans 'line or  source';  therefore  Agotravi 
means  'unconnected  with  anything,'  for  it  has  no  source 
with  which  it  can  be  connected.  Vamah  meani^  "those 
whicli  are  described,  i.  e.,  projierties  of  objects  such  as 
bi^iess,  etc.,  whiteness,  Ac.;(iV((r]min,  'that  wliich  has 
no  properties';  the  eye  and  the  ear  are  organs  found 
in  all  animals  perceiving  name  and  form.  It  is  said  to 
be  achaki^hn  8rotra7ii,  becaiis  it  has  not  these  organs. 
From  the  attribute  of  intelligence,  as  inferred  from  the 
text  "  who  knows  all  and  everything  of  each",  it  may  be 
thought  that  it  accomplishes  its  lairjjose,  like  people  in 
samaara,  with  the  aid  of  organs  such  as  the  eye,  the 
ear,  etc.  This  supposition  is  here  avoided  by  the  expres- 
sion "having  neither  eye  nor  ear"  ;  for  the  texts  "  he 
sees  without  eyes"  and  "  hears  without  ears  ",  etc.,  are 
found  ;  moreover,  it  has  neither  hands  nor  feet,  i.e., 
has  no  organs  of  action  ;  thus  as  it  is  neither  grasped 
nov  grasps,  it  is  nitya,  i.e.,  immortal.  Vibhum, 
because  it  is  diversely  manifested  in  the  form  of  living 
things  from  Brdhma  down  to  the  immovable.  Sarva- 
(jatmn,  i.e.,  all-pervading  like  the  akas.  Susukahtruim, 
i.e.,  extremely  subtle,  because  there  is  no  cause  like 
sound  to  make  it  gross  ;  for,  it  is    sound  and     tlie  rest 


102  MUNDAKOPANISHAD. 

that  are  the  causes  senatim  of"  the  ii,Teater  and  greater 
grossness  of  the  rt/^s,  wind  and  the  rest  ;     as    they  do 
not  exist  here,  it  is  very  subtle  ;  again,  it  is  avyayam, 
i.e.,  undecaying,  because  of  its  being  what  it  was   just 
stated  to  be  ;  it  does  not    decay,     therefore,     it  is    un- 
decaying ;  for  decay  consisting  in    the    diminution  of 
limbs,  as  in  the  case  of  a  body,  is  not  possible  in    what 
has  no  lindis  ;  nor  is  '  decay'  consisting  in    tlie     dimi- 
nution of  treasure  possible  as  in  the  case    of  a     king  ; 
nor  is  '  decay'  in  respect  of  attributes   i)Ossible,  because 
it  has  no  attributes  and  is    itself  all.      Yat,   answering 
to  this  description.     Bladayoniini,  the    source    of    all 
created  things  or  elements,   as  earth  is    of    all     that  is 
immovable  and  moxalile,     Paripasyanti,    see    every- 
where the  Atmdii  of  all,  i.e.,  the  innnortal  Dhirah,  the 
intelligent,  i.e.,  those  possessed  of  discernment ;     that 
knowledge  by  which  this  innnortal  Brahman  is  known 
is  what  is  called  Para  vidya;   this  is    the  drift  of  the 
whole. 

As  the  spider  creates  and  absorbs,  as  medicinal  j)lants 
grow  from  the  earth,  as  hairs  grow  from  tlie  living  per- 
son, so  this  universe  proceeds  from  the  innnortal.      (7) 


WITH  SKI  SANKARA'S   COMMENTARY.  103 

Com. —  It  was  said  the  immortal  is  the  source  of  all 
created  thintifs.  How  it  is  the  source  is  explained 
by  well-known  analogies ;  as  is  well-known  in  the 
world,  the  spider  without  requiring  any  other  cause 
itself  creates,  i.  e.,  sends  out  threads  not  distinct 
from  its  own  body  and  a^ain  absorbs  them  itself,  i.  e., 
draws  them  into  itself  or  makes  them  part  of  itself;  as 
medicinal  plants,  i.  e.,  from  the  corn  plant  to  the  immo- 
vable, not  distinct  from  the  earth,  proceed  from  the 
earth,  and  as  from  the  livinji;  person  the  hairs  proceed 
different  in  nature  from  him  ;  as  in  these  illustrations, 
so  here,  i.  e.,  in  the  cii-cle  of  samaara,  all  the  universe 
of  the  same  and  different  nature  proceeds  from  the 
akshara  above  descrilied,  without  recpiirino-  any  other 
cause  ;  the  statement  of  many  analoj^ies  is  to  facilitate 
easy  understandino-  of  the  ineanintif ;  universe  which 
proceeds  from  the  BrahnuLii  proceeds  in  this  order  and 
not  all  at  once,  like  the  throwini^  of  a  handful  of  apples. 

cTT^T  =€Tqrr  ^^  cTcTTSvTlTmiTT^  I 

By  tapas  Brahman  increases  in  size  and  from  it  food 
is  produced  ;  from  food  the  prana,  the  mind,  the 
Bhiitas  the  worlds,  karma  and  with  it,  its  fruits.       (8) 


1 04  MUNDAKOPANISHAD. 

GoTTi. —  This  7)iantra  is  begun  for  the  purpose  of 
stating  the  fixed  order  of  creation.  '  By  tapas,'  by 
knowledge  of  how  to  create  the  Brahman  which  is 
the  source  of  all  created  things  ;  '  increases, '  i.  e.,  be- 
comes distended,  being  desirous  to  create  the  world  as 
a  seed  when  sending  out  the  sprout,  or  as  a  father 
desirous  of  begetting  a  son  dilates  with  joy  ;  from  tlic 
Brahman  thus  extended  by  its  omniscience,  i.  e.,  by 
its  knowledge  and  its  power  of  creation,  preservation 
and  destruction  of  the  universe ;  Annam  means  '  that 
which  is  eaten  or  enjoyed',  i.  e.,  the  mimanifested 
(avyakritani)  common  to  all  in  samsarais  produced  in 
the  state  fit  for  emancipation  ;  and  from  "  the  unmani- 
fested",  i.  e.,  the  "  Annam"  in  the  state  fit  for  manifes- 
tation. Prana,  i.  e.,  Hiranyagarbha,  the  common  cos- 
mic entity,  endowed  with  the  ])ower  of  knowledge  and 
activity  of  the  Brahman,  the  sprouting  seed,  as  it  were, 
of  the  totality  of  cosmic  ignorance,  desire,  harmia,  and 
creatures  and  the  Atman  of  the  universe.  "  Is 
produced",  should  be  supplied.  From  that  praaa 
that  which  is  called  "  mind"  whose  characteristic 
is  volition,  deliberation,  doubt,  determination. 
etc.,  is  produced  ;  and  from  that  mind  whose 
essence    is    volition,    etc.,    what    is  called    satyam, 


WITH  SKI  sankaka's  commextaky.  105 

i.  e.,  the  five  elements  sucli  as  the  ((JcdS.  etc.,  are 
produeecl  and  from  the  five  elements  called  satya,  the 
seven  worlds,  the  earth,  etc.,  are  prodnced  in  the  order 
of  the  olobes  ;  and  in  theiri  karjtui,  for  the  living  beings, 
man,  etc.,  according  to  caste  and  the  order  of  life,  is 
produced  ;  and  with  karmia  as  the  canse,  its  fruits.  As 
long  as  karnyt  is  not  destroyed,  even  by  hundreds  of 
millions  of  kalpa,  so  long  is  its  fruit  not  destroyed. 
Hence  it  is  called  Amritarii. 

From  the  Brahnuiii  who  knows  all  and  everything 
of  all  and  whose  fftprts  is  in  the  nature  of  knowledge, 
this  Brah7)ui,  name,  form  and  food  are  produced.     (9) 

Com. — By  way  of  concluding  what  was  already 
stated  tlie  mantra  says  as  follows  :  '  Yah,^  above 
described  and  named  akshara;  Sarvajiui  means  he 
who  knows  all,  who  knows  all  things  as  a  class. 
Sarvavid,  i.  e.,  who  knows  everything  in  particular  ; 
whose  tapas  is  only  a  modification  of  knowledge,  consists 
in  omniscience  and  is  not  in  the  nature  of  modification. 
From  him  so  described,  omniscient,  this,  i.  «.,  mani- 
fested Brahman  by  name  Hiranyagarblui,  is  produced. 
Again  name,  such  as  '  This   is  Devadatta  and    Yajiui- 


106  MUNDAKOPANISHAD. 

datta,  etc' ;  and  form  such  as  this  is  white,  bhie,  etc, 
and  food  such  as  corn,  yava,  etc,  are  produced  in 
the  Order  stated  in  the  last  text ;  thus  there  is  no  in- 
consistency. 


Here  ends  the  commentary 

on  the  first  part  of  the 

first  Mundaka. 


itUiubakopauieihaO 


PART.  II 

fTTcTc^?t    ^^%    Wf^    "^^1    ^J'^iA^^f^    ^cfT^rt    W^JT 

^J7^]^T7J(  R?icT  H?i^p:mr  tt^  m  ^^m:  §^^  ^t%  ii  "i  «>  ii 

The  various  karma  which  seers  found  in  the  'numtras 
are  true  and  were  nuu-h  practised  in  the  Treta  age  ; 
practise  them  always  with  true  wishes.  Tliis  is  your 
way  to  the  attainment  of  the  fruits  of  karma.        (10) 

Goini. — By  the  text  the  Rlij  Veda,  the  Yajar  Veda, 
etc.,  all  Vedas  with  their  arajas  (ai)pendaj>;es)  have 
been  stated  to  be  apara  vidya ;  and  para  vidya  has 
been  specifically  stated  to  lie  that  knowledj^e  by  which 
the  akshara  described  in  the  text  beginning  with 
"  That  which  cannot  be  perceived,  etc,."  and  ending^ 
with  "  Name,  form  and  food  are  produced",  is  known. 
Hereafter,  the  next  text  is  begun  to  distinguish 
between  the  bondage  of  sanisara  and  emancipation,  the 


108  MUNDAKOrANISHAD. 

subjects  of  these  two  sorts  of  knowledtre  respectively. 
Of  these,  the  subject  of  apara  viydoj  is  samsara  which 
consists  in  the  variety  of  action,  its  ineans  siich  as  doer, 
etc.,  and  its  results,  is  without  beginniuii;  or  end,  and 
being  misery  in  its  nature,  should  be  discarded  by 
every  embodied  being  ;  and  in  its  entirety  it  is  of  an 
unbroken  connection  like  the  stream  of  a  river.  The 
subject  of  jjara  vidya  is  emancipation  which  consists  in 
the  cessation  oisamisara,  which  is  beginningless,  endless, 
undecaying,  immortal,  deathless,  fearless,  pure  and  clear 
and  is  nothing  but  being  centred  in  self  and  transcend- 
ent bliss  without  a  second ;  first  it  is  attem])ted  to 
elucidate  the  subject  oi  apara.  vidya',  for,  it  is  only  when 
it  is  seen  that  it  is  possible  to  get  disgusted  with  it ;  ac- 
cordingly it  will  be  said  later  on  "  Having  examined  the 
world  attained  by  kai'^ia" ;  and  as  there  can  be  no  ex- 
amination of  what  is  not  presented  to  the  view,  the  text 
shows  what  it  is.  '  Satyam.''  True."  What  is  that?  Man- 
treshu,  in  the  Vedaskiumn  as  Big,  Yajur,  etc.  ^Karmami', 
Agnihotra  and  the  rest  disclosed  by  texts  of  the  Vedas; 
*  Kavayah,^ '  seers  like  Vasishthaand  'others'.  Apasyan 
have  seen.  This  is  true  because  they  are  the  unfailing 
means  of  accom])lishingtlie  objects  of  man.  Tiiese  en- 
joined by  the  Vedas  and  seen  by  the  Riahia  were  done 


WITH    SHI    .SANKAKA'S    rOMMKNTAKV.  109 

in  diverse  ways  by  the  followers  of"  kariita.  Tretayani, 
i.  e.,  wiierein  there  is  the  combination  of  the  three 
Fl?rf<'fc8  of  the  three  modes  of  rites  performed  with  the 
aid  of  a  hot(t,  adhvaryu  and  juhjata,  or  it  may  mean 
that  they  were  o;enerally  performed  in  tlie  Tretd  age. 
Therefore,  you  should  do  them  always;  *  Sati/dkaiiuih^ 
'  wishing  for  those  fruits  which  they  can  iiear.'  This  is 
your  route  for  the  attainment  of  the  fruits  of  Karnnd. 
SukHUtsyd,  performed  by  you;  Lobi  is  what  is  found, 
or  enjoyed  ;  hence  the  fruits  of  Kdritia  are  denoted  by 
the  word  ''  Lokd."  The  meaning  is  that,  to  attain 
tiiem,  this  is  the  route.  These  Kdvina,  Af/nihotra  and 
the  rest  enjoined  in  the  Vedas  form  the  road,  i.e.,  the 
means  for  the  attainment  of  the  necessary  fruits. 

Wiien  the  flame  of  the  fire  burning  high  is  nioxing, 
then  one  should  j)erform  the  oblations  in  the  space  be- 
tween the  i)ortions,  where  the  ghee  should  be  poured 
on  either  side.  (11) 

Com. — Of  the  vaiious  kinds  of  kdrnm,  (iffiiikotra  is 
first  exi)lained  to  show  what  it  is,  because  it  is  the  first 
of  all  hiriaa.     How  is  that  to  be  performed  ?     ^^llen 


110  MUNDAKOPANISHAD. 

the  flame  moves,  the  five  beino-  well  fed  by  fuel,  then 
in  the  flame  so  moving-  lietvveen  the  portions  where 
quantities  of  ohee  are  poured  on  either  side,  i.e.,  in  the 
place  called  avdpastkaim  one  should  throw  the  obla- 
tions intending  them  for  the  devata.  As  the  same  has 
to  be  done  durino'  many  days  the  plural  oblations  is 
used.  This  hwma  nuirga  which  consists  in  projjerly 
offerinfif  the  oblations,  etc.,  is  the  road  to  the  attainment 
of  o;ood  worlds  liut  it  is  not  easy  to  do  that  }>roperly 
and  the  impediments  are  many. 

He  whose  rignihotra  is  witbout  Darsd,  witllOutPa.^M'- 
luvTYiasa,  without  ChaturTtiasya,  without  ((grayana, 
W'ithout  atithi  (ouests)  and  without  oblation  is  without 
vaisvadeva,  or  irref]fu1arly  ])erformed,  destroys  his  worlds 
till  the  seventh.  (12) 

CoTTi. — How  is  that  so?  'Without  Darsa\  with- 
out ritual  named  Daraa ;  for,  one  wlio  j^erforms  (i/piiho- 
<?'«  should  necessarily  perform  Darsa;  tbouoh  connected 
with  (ujnikotrd.  (as  a  part  of  it)  it  becomes  as  it  were 
an  attribute  of  (((pdhotrd.  The  drift  is  Agnihotra 
without  Darsa  performed.     Tlie   ex])ressions  "without 


WITH  SHI  SANKAHA'S  COMMENTARY.  Ill 

paurna'mfisa,  etc..  as  attributes  of  (ujnihotra  should 
be  siiiiilariy  noted  ;  for,  all  are  e([ually  tlie  angas 
(parts)  oi  agnihotrdj.  '  Without  PaurTutniasa,^  devoid  of 
tht^  Paitrna'masff,  riUm],  'Without  ChdtumiasyaJ'  de- 
void of  the  Chatarinasya  ritual.  '  Without  agrayana', 
devoid  of  the  agraymut  ritual  which  is  to  be  performed 
in  autumn,  etc.;  similarly  '  without  (Uithi%  devoid  of 
the  daily  propitiation  of  guests  ;  '  ahutar)i\  oblation 
not  offered  well  by  himself  at  the  time  for  (ignihotra. 
"  Without  vaisvadeva",  like  "  without  Darsa",  me^ins 
devoid  of  the  vaisvadeva  ritual.  Is  "  irrejjjularly  per- 
formed,' oblation  though  offered,  not  offered  in  the 
propter  manner.  What  such  karma,  as  mpiihotra  ill- 
performed  or  not  performed  at  all,  leads  to,  is  stated 
immediately  after.  *  Till  the  seventh',  inclusive  of 
the  seventh.  '  His.'  of  the  doer.  '  Destroys  the 
seven  worlds  of  the  doer',  seems  to  destroy  ;  because 
only  the  trouble  taken  is  the  fruit ;  for,  it  is  only  when 
karma  is  projjcrly  performed,  the  seven  worlds  begin- 
ning with  Bhu  and  ending  with  satya  are  obtained  as 
result,  according  to  the  fruition  of  the  kaiina.  These 
worlds  are  not  obtainable  by  agnihotra  and  other 
^rtrmrt,  performed  as  just  above  stated  and  they  are 
therefore  said  to  be  as  it    were    destroyed  ;     Imt    the 


112  MUNDAKOPANISHAI). 

Tuere  trouble  is  ever  present  ;  or,  it  may  be  construed 
to  mean  that  the  three  ancestors  (the  father,  tlie 
grand-father  and  the  great-grand-father)  and  tlie  three 
descendants  (the  son,  tlie  grandson  and  the  great- 
grandson)  connected  by  the  offer  of  oblations  do  not 
confer  any  benefit  on  Ids  soul  by  virtue  of  the  (((jnihotra 
and  the  rest,  performed  as  above  stated. 

Kali,  karali,  also  Tnanojava,  sulothia,  audhum- 
ravarnn,  sphidingini,  and  visvarttchi  are  the  seven 
moving  tongues  of  fire. 

Com. — The  seven  tongues  of  the  (flaming)  fire, 
from  k(di  down  to  visvaruchi,  are  intended  to  swallow 
the  oblations  thrown  on  it. 

cf^^T^cTT:  ^^  ?^^T  ^^\^W  TfcH^SmTH:   II  '^^  II 

Him  who  ])erformed  karnui  {(((jnihotra)  in  the 
bright  flames  at  the  prosier  time,  these  oblations,  per- 
formed by  him,  c(mdnct  through  the  rays  of  the  sun 
where  the  l^ord  of  the  Devas  is  sole  sovereign.         (14) 

Cm)i. — Tlie  ((gnihotH  who  performs  the  karma, 
agnihotra  and   the     rest,    in     these    different    bright 


WITH  SKI  SANKAKA'S  COMMENTARY.  113 

tongues  of  the  fire,  at  the  time  fixed  for  the  j)er- 
forniance  of  the  Icarni/i,  these  oblations  (performed  by 
liim)  becoming  so  many  rays  of  the  sun  conduct  him 
to  Heaven,  where  Indm,  Lord  of  the  Bevas,  singly 
rules  over  all.     '  Adadfiyan,^  taking  (the  sacrificer). 

^[SlCTTrr  fTm|cT?i:  %^^:  ^¥T  n^M^^finTTJt  ^?f'rT  I 

These  oblations  shining  bright  carry  the  sacrificer 
through  the  rays  of  the  sun  bidding  him  welcome,  pro- 
l>itiating  liim  and  greeting  him  with  })leasing  words. 
This  is  the  well-laid  })ath  of  virtue  leading  to  Brah- 
maloka.  (15) 

Com. —  How  these  carry  the  sacrificer  through 
the  sun's  rays  is  now  ex^jlained  ;  calling  "  come, 
come,"  these  bright  oblations  greeting  him  with 
pleasant  words,  i.e.,  with  words  of  jjraise,  etc.,  and  pro- 
pitiating him,  i.  e.,  addressing  him  with  such  pleasing 
words,  as  "  this  is  your  virtuous  and  well-laid  road  to 
Brahmaloka,  tlie  fruits  of  your  deeds."  The  word 
Brahmalokd  by  the  force  of  the  context  means 
"  Svarga  or  Heaven.  " 

8 


114  MUNDAKOrAMSHAD. 

The  eighteen  persons  necessary  for  the  performance 
of  sacrifice  are  transitory  and  not  i)ernianent  and  karma 
in  its  nature  inferior,  has  been  stated  as  resting  upon 
these.  Those  ignorant  persons  who  deliglit  in  this,  as 
leading  to  bliss,  again  fall  into  decay  and  death.      (10) 

C(yiti. — This  karma,  devoid  of  knowledge,  bears 
but  this  mncli  fruit  and  being  accomplished  by 
ignorance,  desire  and  action,  is  sapless  and  is  the 
source  of  misery.  Therefore  it  is  condemned.  "  Plava" 
means  '  ephemeral '  because  these  are  adridha,  i.e., 
not  permanent.  Yajnarupa,  the  forms  of  sacrifice, 
i.  e.,  necessary  for  the  performance  of  the  sacrifice. 
Eighteen  in  number,  consisting  of  the  sixteen  Ritviks, 
the  sacrificer  and  his  wife.  Karma  stated  in  the  sastras 
depends  on  these.  Avaramkarma,  i.  e.,  mere  karma 
devoid  of  knowledge ;  and  as  the  i)erformance  of  karma 
which  is  inferior  dei>ends  on  tliese  eighteen  who  are  not 
permanent.  The  karnui  done  by  them  and  its  fruit  are 
ephemeral,  as,  when  the  pot  is  destroyed,  the  destruc- 
tion of  milk,  curd,  etc.,  in  it,  follows.  This  being  so, 
those  ignorant  persons  who  delight  in  tliis  karma  as 
the  means  of  bliss,  fall  again  into  decay  and  death,  after 
staying  some  time  in  Heaven. 


WITH    SHI    SANKAKA'S    COMMENTARY.  115 

l^^^^]^v.  Tfr^T^cT  ijTT  '?n%%?  sfrjrqHT  ?t^tt^t:  ii  ^  ^s  ii 

BeiiJt;-  ill  the  midst  of  ionoraiu-e  and  thinkino;  in 
tlieir  own  minds  tliat  they  are  intelligent  and  learned, 
the  ionorant  wander,  afflicted  with  troubles,  like  the 
blind  led  by  the  blind.  (17) 

Co7H. —  Moreover,  liein«;  in  the  midst  of  ionoranee, 
i.  e.,  bein^-  utterly  ignorant  and  thinking  in  their 
own  minds  *'  we  alone  are  intellioeut  and  have 
known  all  that  should  be  kn»)wn."  Thus  Hatter- 
in<;'  themselves,  the  i^^norant  wander  much  afliic-ted 
by  old  age,  sickness  and  a  lot  of  their  troubles,  being 
devoid  of  vision  as  the  blind  in  this  world,  going  the 
way  pointed  out  by  persons,  themselves  blind,  fall  into 
ditch  and  brambles. 

?7c^fR?nt  5T  q%^i^  nirmsTTgTT:  ^tiiMt^rr^'E^T^  ii  ^^^  ii 

The  ignorant  following  the  diverse  ways  of  ignor- 
ance, flatter  themselves  that  their  objects  have  lieen 
accomplished.  As  these  followers  of  htfTrui  do  not 
learn  the  truth  owing  to  their  desire,  they  grow 
niisei'able  and  after  the  fruits  of  their  hirma  are  con- 
sumed, fall  from  Heaven.  (18) 


116  MUNDAKOPANISHAD. 

Com. —  The  ignorant  acting  diversely  according  to 
ignorance,  flatter  themselves  that  they  have  aehie\ed 
what  they  should.  This  being  so,  the  followers  of 
karinui  do  not  learn  the  truth  as  they  are  assailed  with 
the  desire  for  the  fruits  of  karma  ;  tliey  grow  miser- 
able for  that  reason  and  fall  from  lieaven  after  the 
fruits  of  their  karrtia  are  consumed. 

^T^^  ^  ^  1^S3^J^  ^t^  f  T^TcTt  ^T  f^^RT  II  ^  ^  II 

These  ignorant  men  regarding  sacrificial  and  charit- 
able acts  as  most  important,  do  not  know  any  other 
help  to  bliss  ;  having  enjoyed  in  the  heights  of  Heaven 
the  abode  of  pleasures,  they  enter  again  into  this  or 
even  inferior  world.  (19) 

Com. — ^^  Ishtam"  karma,  enjoined  by  the  Srutis  as 
sacrifices,  etc.  "  Purtavi"  karma,  enjoined  by  Smritis 
such  as  the  digging  of  pools,  wells,  tanks,  etc.  Re- 
garding these  alone  as  the  most  important  aids  to  the 
attainment  of  human  olrjects,  these  ignorant  men,  being 
infatuated  with  attachment  to  their  sons,  cattle  and 
ralatives,  do  not  know  the  other  called  'knowledge  of 
self  which  is  the  help  to  bliss.  Having  enjoyed  in  the 
top  of  liea\en — the   place   of  pleasures — the    fruits   of 


WITH    SRI    SANKAKA's   COMMENTARY.  117 

their  karma,  they  enter  again  into  this  world  of  men 
or  even  inferior  world,  such  as  the  world  of  horizontal 
beings,  hell,  etc.,  according  to  the  residue  of  their 
kavnia. 

?fT:«i%  ^  ^^'%^'V^vi^  ^tt^t  f^mr  ^w^^[  ^tt^:  i 
^W^  ^  f^m:  jpiTf^  ^T^rgcT:  ^  5^  9is?nn?m  n  ^<>  11 

Kut  they  wjio  j)erforni  tapas  and  sraddha  in  the 
forest,  having  a  control  over  their  senses,  learned  and 
living  the  life  of  a  mendicant,  go  through  the  orb  of 
the  sun,  their  good  and  bad  deeds  consumed,  to  where 
the  immortal  and  undecaying  pnr^tsha  is.  (20) 

Com. —  Hut  those  who  ])ossess  the  knowledge  con- 
trary to  that  of  j)ersons  jaeviously  mentioned,  'I.e.,  the 
hermits  of  the  foiest  and  the  Sftni/asins.  '  Tapah,^ 
the  karma  enjoined  on  one's  order  of  life.  '  Sr((<ldha,^ 
the  worship  of  the  Hirany<ujarbha  and  other  deities. 

*  Upavasanti,'  follow  :    '  Aranye,^  living  in  the  forest. 

*  Santah,''  having  control  over  the  grou])  of  senses. 
Miearned'  includes  also  house-holders  who  })Ossess 
chiefly  knowledge,  living  by  begging  ;  because,  they 
have  nothing  to  call  their  own.  '  Living  on  alms'  is 
connected  with  *  living  in  the  forest.'  'Through  the 
orb  of  the  sun,'  throuiih  the  northern    route  indicated 


118  MUNDAKOPANISHAD. 

by  the  sun.  '  Virajah,''  their  ^ood  and  bad  deeds 
being  consumed.  '  Frapmiti,'  go  witli  excellence. 
'  Where,'  to  Satyalohh  wliere  the  immortal  Paruska, 
the  first  born,  undecaying  Hiranyagarbha  is.  '  Un- 
decaying,'  because  he  lives  to  the  end  of  sdoiisara. 
With  this,  end  the  movements  within  the  pale  of 
samsara  attainable,  through  a/para  vidya.  If  it  lie 
said  that  some  regard  this  as  emancii)ation,  we  say  it 
is  not  so,  because  of  the  Srutis,  '  All  his  desii-es  are 
even  here  absorbed'  and  'those  intelligent  persons 
whose  mind  is  concentrated  reach  the  all-pervading,  on 
all  sides  and  enter  into  everything,  etc.,'  and  because 
of  the  mention  of  emancipation  being  irrelevant  in 
this  context  ;  for,  in  the  course  of  treating  of  the 
apara  vidya,  there  is  no  pertinency  of  emanci})ation 
being  brought  in.  The  consumj)tion  of  htiiiui  sjioken 
of  is  only  relative  ;  all  the  result  of  the  apard  vidya 
being  in  the  nature  of  ends  and  means  nnd  diversified 
by  the  difference  of  acts,  recpiisites  and  fruits  and 
partaking  of  duality  is  only  this  much,  which  ends 
with  reaching  Hiranyagarbha.  Accordingly  also  it  has 
been  said  by  jJ/roiif  s])eaking  of  the  various  stages  with- 
in aaiusara  from  the  immovable  ui)wards  :  '  The  wise 
consider  this  a  high  and   ])ure  stage  to  nttnin  the  world 


WITH  SKI  sankaka's  commextary.  119 

of  BraJmui,  tlie  Prajapatia   (creators),  ^•irtue,  Ttuihat 
and  avyalda. 

Tvet  a  Brahrnin  having  examined  the  worlds  produc- 
ed by  kai^ifi  be  free  froin  desires,  tliinkinfj,  '  there  is 
nothing  eternal  jnodnced  by  kaniui^;  and  in  order  to 
ac(juire  the  knowledge  of  the  eternal,  let  him  Samid 
(sacrificial  fuel)  in  hand,  approacii  a  percei)tor  alone, 
who  is  versed  in  tlie  Vedaa  and  centered  in  the  Brah- 
man, (21) 

Com. — Now,  this  is  said  for  the  jjurjiose  of  showing 
that  only  the  person  thoroughly  disgusted  with  all 
aanisara  which  is  in  the  nature  of  ends  and  means,  is 
entitled  to  accjuire  the  para  vidya.  '  Parikahya'  well 
knowing  that  the  subject  of  apara  vidya  consisting  of 
the  Rifj,  and  other  ]'^eila8,  jierformable  by  a  person 
tainted  with  the  defects  of  natural  ignorance,  desires 
and  karma  has  been  intended  for  a  person  ]>ossessed  of 
such  defects  and  after  examining  those  worlds  which 
are  the  fruits  of  such  kar^na  ])erformed,  attiiinable  by 
tlie  northern  and  southern  routes  and  these  others  such 
as  Hell,  the  world  of  beasts  and  the  world  of  departed 


120  MUNDAKOPANISHAD. 

spirits,  which  are  the  result  of  the  vices  of  not  perform- 
ing the  prescribed  karma  and  performino-  the  forbidden 
karma ;  after  having  examined  these  worlds  with  the 
aid  of  experience,  inference,  analogies  and  agamas,  i.e., 
determined  the  true  nature  of  all  these  worlds  attain- 
able by  one,  within  the  pale  of  sanisara,  beginning  from 
the  avyakta  down  to  the  immovable,  manifested  and 
iinmanifested  in  their  nature,  pioductixe  of  each  other 
like  the  seed  and  its  sprout,  agitated  by  a  hundred 
thousand  troubles,  fragile  like  the  womb  of  the  plan- 
tain, similar  in  kind  to  illusion,  the  waters  of  the 
mirage,  the  shape  of  cities  formed  by  the  clouds  in  the 
sky,  dreams,  water-bubbles  and  foam  and  destroyed 
every  moment  and  discarding  all  these  as  being  pro- 
duced by  good  and  bad  deeds  and  ac(piired  by  kariim 
induced  by  the  faults  of  ignorance  and  desire.  The 
word  '  Brahmana  '  is  here  used  because  tlie  Brahndn  is 
sjjecially  competent  to  ac(juire  the  knowledge  of  Brah- 
irtian  through  wholesale  renunciation.  What  he  should 
do  after  examining  these  worlds  is  explained.  '  Xirve- 
dam,^  the  root  vid  with  the  ])refix  )iih  is  here  used  in 
the  sense  of  freedom  from  desires.  The  nieiiiiing  is 
that  he  will  get  disgusted.  The  mode  of  disgust  is 
thus  shown  :   '  Here,'  in  samsara  there  is  nothing  which 


WITH    SHI    SANKARA's   COMMENTARY.  121 

is  not  made  ;  for,  all  worlds  produced  by  karma  are 
transitory.  The  nieanin<j'  is :  there  is  nothino-  eternal  ; 
for  all  hartiui  is  help  to  what  is  merely  transitory.  All 
that  is  jnodueed  by  kaiTtia  is  one  of  four  kinds,  that 
which  is  produced,  that  which  is  reached,  that  which 
is  refined  and  that  which  is  modified  ;  beyond  this 
nothing;'  can  be  done  by  Icarma.  But  I  am  a  seeker 
after  that  consunmmtion  which  is  eternal,  immortal, 
fearless,  chan<^eless,  inunovable  and  constant ;  but  not 
after  one  of  a  contrary  nature  ;  of  what  use  therefore  is 
kariua  which  is  full  of  trouble  and  which  leads  to  mis- 
ery ?  Thus  disousted,  the  Brnhiniit  should,  for  know- 
ing that  abode  which  is  fearless,  full  of  bliss,  not  made, 
and  eternal,  only  a})proach  a  preceptor,  jiossessing 
attributes  such  as  control  of  mind,  control  of  the  exter- 
nal senses  and  iriercy,  etc.,  (the  force  of  the  word  '  alone' 
is  to  show  that  even  one  versed  in  the  recital  of  the 
sastras  should  not  independently  by  himself  seek  the 
knowledge  of  the  Brahnuvn)  with  a  load  oi'  Sauml  in  his 
hand.  '  Srotriyam,''  versed  in  the  recital  of  the  Vedas 
and  the  knowledge  of  its  injport.  '  Brahiiianisldliaiti '; 
Mke  japanishtha  and  tapoiiishtha,  this  word  means  'one 
who  is  centred  in  the  Brahrnan  devoid  of  attributes  and 
without  a  second,  after  renouncing  all  htriua  ;  for,  one 


122  MUNDAKOPANISHAD. 

performing;  Icarnui  cannot  lie  centred  in  the  Brahman 
on  account  of  tlie  antaoonisni  between  karma  and  the 
knowledge  of  the  Atitian.  Havint>'  duly  approached 
the  gitrii,  let  the  Brahmin  i)Yo\ntii\ie  liini  and  (piestion 
him  about  tlie  true  and  immortal  Fursha. 

To  him  who  has  tlius  approaclied,  wliose  heart  is 
well  subdued  and  who  lias  control  over  his  senses,  let 
him  truly  teach  that  Brahviavidya  by  which  the  true 
immortal  puruaha  is  known.  (22) 

Com. — '  He,'  the  learned  precej^tor  who  knows  the 
Brahrtiaii',  '  Upasaimaya,^  who  has  api)roached  him. 
^Satnyak,  i.e.,  well,  accordino-  to  the  sastras;  ^ Pra- 
santa  chittaya,*  i.e.,  whose  heart  is  subdued,  who 
is  free  from  such  faults  as  i)ride,  etc.  '  Samanvitaya,^ 
who  lias  control  also  over  the  external  senses,  i.  e., 
who  has  turned  away  from  everythino-  in  the  world. 
'  By  which  knowlediije,'  by  ihepara,  vidya,  '  Aksharam' 
that  which  has  been  descrilied  as  im])erceivable,  eti„ 
and  denoted  by  the  word  Purttslta,  because  it  is 
all  pervading  ;  or,  because  it  is  seated  in  the  city  of  the 
body.      '  Satyam,''  the  same,    because  it  is  truth   in  its 


WITH  SKI  SANKARA'S  COMMKNTAKY.  12S 

nature.  '  Akshara,''  because  it  knows  no  decay, 
because  it  is  scatliless,  and  because  it  knows  no 
destructioij.  ^  Vecla^  means  'know.'  Tlie  meaning 
is  '  let  him  teacli  that  knowledge  of  the  Brahman,  as 
it  should  be  taught.  This  is  the  duty  of  also  the 
preceptor,  that  he  should  make  the  go(xl  i>upil  duly 
approaching  him,  cross  the  sea  of  ignorance. 


Here  ends  the  commentary  on 

the  second  part  of  the 

First  Mundaka. 


Here  ends  the  First  Mundaka. 


SECOND 
itlmii^akopttuishab 


-o- 


P  A  RT  I. 


rT^TT^fjmT:  HT^  «TT^T:  IT5TnT%  cT^  %rnT  ?T1%  II  ^  II 

This  is  true  ;  as  from  tlie  flamino;  fire  issue  forth,  by 
thousands,  sparks  of  the  same  form,  so  from  the  immor- 
tal proceed,  oood  youtli,  diverse  jivas  and  they  find 
their  way  back  into  it.  (1) 

Com. — Everythini»-  made,  as  tlie  result  of  (Vpara 
mdya  has  already  l)een  stated.  That  entity  known  as 
Ptiruaha  from  which  samsara  derives  its  strength,  from 
which,  as  its  iunuortal  source,  it  ]»roceeds  and  into  which 
it  is  aoain  absorbed  is  true  ;  the  subsecjuent  ])ortion 
of  the  book  is  becjun  for  tlie  jmrpose  of  explaininj^'  him, 
who  bein<r  known,  all  will  become  known  and  who  is 
the  subject  of  ' Brahmavidya.^  The  satyaiih  or  truth 
which  is  tlie  subject  of  the  apara  vidya  and  which 
is  in  the  nature  of  the  fruits  of  kartiia  is  only  relatively 
true  ;  but    this    which  is  the  subject  of  p<(r<i,  vidya  is 


WITH  SKI  SAXKAKA'S  C'OMMENTAKV.  125 

absolutely   true,   bein<^   defined   as    absolute  existence. 
This  sat  i/am  is  real,  bein*;'  the    subject  of   knowledge; 
the  other  satyaiti  is  false,  being  the  subject  of  ignorance. 
How  could  men  directly  cognize  the  immortal  and  real 
Parushfi,  seeiiig  that  it  is  altogether  beyond  the  reach 
of  direct  })ercej)tion.     To  this  end,  the    Sruti  gives  an 
example  :    'As  from  the  fire  well-fetl  sparks,  i.e.,  parti- 
cles of  fire  issue  forth    by  tlicmsands  like  fire    in    their 
form  ;    so,  from   the  inunoital  abode   descrilied,  diverse 
yiwfcs,  diverse  because  of  the    difference   of   conditions, 
i.e.,  in  their  various  bodies,  come  into  existence.     Just 
as  from  ak<i8,  the  spaces  enclosed  as  it  were  within  the 
limits  of  a  pot,  etc'     As  these  spaces  undergo  varieties 
corresponding  to  the  varieties  of   their  conditions  such 
as  pot,  etc.,  so  also  the  jivas  according  to  the  varieties 
of  their  bodies  created  by  names  and  foruis.     'V\\^  jivas 
are    absorbed    into    the  immortal   pui^usha   when   the 
bodies  conditioning  tliem  cease  to  exist,  as  the    various 
cavities  cease  to  exist,  wlien    tlie    pot,    etc.,    cease    to 
exist.     As  the  origin  and    destruction    of  the    various 
cavities  in  the  rt^fts  are  due  to  its  being    enclosed  in  a 
pot,  etc.,  so  also  the  cause  and    the    absorption    of  the 
jiva  are   due    to  the   akshara,    being    conditioned  by 
bodies  bearing  names  and  forms. 


126  MUNDAKOPAMSHAI). 

f^^t  5IJJcT:  ^T.  H^T5irPT^cTn  mw.  I 

He  is  bright,  formless.  all-})ervudin<;-,  existhio-  with- 
out and  within,  unborn,  witlu)ntji>7'a>irfc,  without  mind, 
pure  and  beyond  tlie  avyakrita,  wliich  is  beyond  all. (2) 

Cmn, — With  a  view  to  describe  the  nature  of  tliat 
nkshara,  i.e.,  which  is  beyond  what  is  known  as  avya- 
krita (the  unmanifested),  the  seed  of  all  naine  and 
form  and  transcendini;  its  own  modifications  whicli  is 
devoid  of  all  varieties  of  conditions  and  beieft  of  all 
forms  like  the  akas  and  which  is  capable  of  hein^-  only 
neoatively  defined,  the  text  says  thus.  '  JHvt/ak,' 
brit>ht,  beino  self-resplendent,  or  born  of  itself  or 
distinct  from  all  that  is  wordly.  *  Hi',  because  ;  aniur- 
taJi,'  liavin<i;  no  form  of  any  kind.  '  Pnr'aska,^  all- 
pervading'  or  seated  in  the  city  of  the  body.  '  Sabalit/a- 
hhyaatarah^  means  'existin*;-  both  without  and  within." 
Unlwrn '  is  '  not  iiorn  of  anythin*;.'  i.e.,  neither 
from  itself  nor  f rot II  any  other,  there  beini;'  no  otiier. 
from  which  it  could  be  born.  As  wind,  etc,,  in  the 
case  of  water  bubbles,  and  as  the  ])()t,  etc..  in  the 
ease  of  the  different  cavities  of  akaa,  so  modifications 
of  thinj;s,   have    birth    for  their   source,  and    all    these 


WITH  SKI  SANKAIU'S  COMMENTARY.  127 

modifications  are  denied  when  hiitli  is  denied.  The 
drift  is  tliat  he  is  both  without  and  within,  unicorn 
and  tlierefore  undecayin<;,  immortal,  ehanjifeless, 
constant  and  fearless.  Thouj^h  he  aj)pears  to  be  in 
tiie  various  bodies  with  proiia,  with  mind,  with  senses 
and  with  tiieir  objects  owin<;'  to  the  ignorance  of  tliose 
who  perceive  difference  of  conditions,  such  as  bodies, 
etc.,  as  tiiey  see  in  the  (iJcaa  the  colour  etc.,  of  the 
surface  ;  but  still  to  those  who  see  the  reality,  he  is 
without  jn'ami,  etc.  ;  he  is  without  pi'mui,  i.  e.,  in 
whom  tlie  mind,  whicii  has  various  active  powers  and 
whose  characteristic  is  motion,  does  not  exist.  He  is 
without  mind  because  in  him  the  mind  with  its  various 
powers  of  knowledge  and  with  its  characteristics  of 
volti<m,  etc.,  does  not  exist.  It  should  be  understood 
that  of  him  are  denied  the  varieties  of  winds  such  as 
praiKiy  the  active  sensory  organs,  their  objects  and 
accordingly  intellioenoe,  mind.  theor<jans  of  knowledge 
and  their  objects.  Accordingly,  ant)tlier  Sruti  says 
'  It  seems  to  think  and  move,'  He  is  siihhra  or  pure, 
because  both  these  conditions  are  thus  denied  of  him. 
The  Akshdva  which  is  beyond  all,  the  Avydkrita 
whose  nature  is  indicated  as  the  seed  condition  of  all 
name  and  form,  as  it  is   known    to   be  the   seed  of  all 


128  MUNDAKOPAMSHAD. 

effects  and  causes;  ^  pa  ram/'  because  the  akshara 
known  as  avyahrita.  is  in  its  condition  above  all 
its  modifications.  The  Purusha  is  beyond  e\en 
this  unmanifested  akshara,  i.  e.,  not  subject  to  any 
conditions.  In  whom  is  the  akshara  known  as 
akas  with  all  the  objects  of  duality  struno-  tooether  as 
warp  and  woof.  How  then  could  it  be  said  to  be  with- 
out 2>*'^''Wfc,  etc  ?  If  porvna,  etc.,  existed  as  such  in 
their  own  forms  before  their  creation  like  the  purusha^ 
then  the  pttrusha  can  be  said  to  be  with  pjYMwr  because 
of  their  then  existence  ;  but  they,  the  pra/un,  etc.,  do 
not,  like  ih^purtisha,  exist  in  their  own  forms,  before 
their  creation.  So  the  highest  purusha  is  witliout 
prami,  etc. 

^  gr^qTl^TTT:  ?mt  T^^?T  vTTWt  II  X  II 
From  him  are  born  i\w pi'ana,  thennnd,  all  the  sen- 
sory orfljans,  the  akas,  the  wind,  the  fire,  water  and  the 
earth  which  sui>i)orts  all.  (,S) 

Co'Di. — As  Devadatta  is  said  to  be  '  aputra'  when  a 
'  putr<C  is  not  born  to  him,  so  it  is  explained  how  it  is 
said  in  this  connection  that  in  tlu^  ^in»e  oi  the  purusha 
the  pi'awty  etc.,  do  not  exist  ;  because  from  this 
purusha  alone  viewed  as  conditioned     by    the  seed  of 


WITH    SHI    SANKAUA'S    COMMENTARY.  12& 

name  and  form  is  born  the  prana,  the  modification  of 
the  object  of  ignorance,  a  mere  name  and  in  its  nature 
a  non-entity  ;  for,  another  Simti  says  '  The  name  is 
mere  speech,  a  modification  and  a  falsehood ' ;  by  prana, 
which  is  an  object  of  it>;norance  and  a  falsehood,  the 
hjohest  cannot  be  said  to  be  jKjssessed  of  it  (pi'ana),  as 
a  son  less  man  cannot  be  said  to  have  a  son,  by  a  son 
seen  in  dreams  ;  similarly  the  mind,  all  the  sensory 
organs  and  their  objects  are  born  of  this.  Therefore^ 
that  he  is  really  v,'ithont  prana,  etc.,  is  established.  1 1 
should  be  known  that  just  as  these  pi^ana,  etc.,  did  not 
really  exist  before  the  creation,  so,  even  after  absorp- 
tion as  the  organs,  the  mind  and  the  senses,  so  the 
bhutas  which  are  the  causes  of  the  bodies  and  objects. 
'  Kftani,^  the  akas,  the  air  internal  and  external,  o 
various  kinds  such  as  avaha,  etc.  ;  *  Jotihi\  fire. 
'  A'pah',  water.  '  PHthivi,'  earth.  '  Visvasya,'  o 
all.  All  these  whose  attributes  are  sound,  touch,  form, 
taste  and  smell  and  which  are  res])ectively  formed  bj' 
the  combination  of  the  latter  with  the  previous  attri- 
butes are  born  of  him.  Having  briefly  stated  the 
immortal,  unconditioned,  eternal  Purusha,  the  objec 
oi  para  vidya,  by  the  text  '  Bright,  formless,  etc'  the 
Sruti  next  proceeded   to  explain  his    nature    in  detail 

9 


130  MUNDAKOPANISHAD. 

and  at  length.  It  is  only  when  a  thing  is  explained 
briefly  and  at  length  it  becomes  capable  of  being 
easily  understood  as  if  explained  by  S^itras  and  by 
their  coninientaries. 

'TT^:  STTOT  ^.^^  Tf ^IT^  T^^\  ?Wt  ^  Hl^?cTnc»n  U^ll 

This  is  he,  the  internal  atnum  of  all  created  things 
whose  head  is  agni,  whose  eyes  are  the  sun,  and  the 
moon,  whose  ears  are  the  four  directions,  whose 
speeches  are  the  emanated  Vedas,  whose  breath  is  vayu, 
whose  heart  is  all  the  universe  and  from  whose  feet  the 
earth  proceeded.  (4) 

Com. — This  text  is  intended  to  show  that  the  virat 
puruaha  within  the  globe,  who  is  born  of  HiranyagaV' 
bha  the  first  born,  is  born  only  and  a  modification,  of 
this  purusha,  though  apparently  distanced  by  an  inter- 
mediate principle.  The  text  also  describes  him. 
^Agnihij  the  deva  loka  or  svarga,  from  the  Sruti 
*  This  loka  verily  is  Agni,  0  Gautarmi.^  '  Murdha* 
head  ;  whose  eyes  are  the  sun  and  the  moon.  The  word 
'  ycisya^  (of  whom)  should  be  read  in  every  clause. 
The  word  ^aayd'  subse(]uently  occurring  being  converted 
into  '  yasya*  whose  si)eech  are  the  opened,  i.e.,  celebrated 


WITH  SRI  SANKARA'S  COMMENTARY.  131 

Ve(l<i8.  'Hridayarn,''  heart.  '  Visvam,''  the  whole 
universe.  The  whole  universe  is  only  a  modification  of 
the  mind  for  it  is  ahsorbed  into  the  mind  during  sleep 
and  because  it  issues  from  the  mind  when  waking,  like 
s])arks  of  fire  and  from  wliose  feet  the  earth  was  born  ; 
this  deity,  all-pervading,  endless,  the  first  embodied 
existence  having  for  its  body  the  three  lokds  is  the 
interior  atman  of  all  created  things  ;  for,  it  is  he  who, 
in  all  created  things,  is  the  seer,  the  hearer,  the  think- 
er, the  knower  and  who  is  the  cause  of  all.  It  is  next 
stated  that  all  living  beings  who  come  into  samsara 
through  the  five  fires  are  also  born  of  the  same  pu- 
ru8ha. 

From  him  the  Agni  {Dyu  loka)  whose  fuel  is  the 
sun  ;  from  the  moon  in  the  l}i/u  loka,  pat^anya 
(clouds)  ;  from  the  clouds,  the  medicinal  plant  that 
grows  on  earth  ;  from  these,  the  male  (fire)  which  sheds 
the  semen  on  woman,  thus  gradually  many  living  beings 
such  as  BraliTnins,  etc.,  are  bom  of  the  Futmsha.     (5) 

Com. — 'FroTn  him,'  fron\  the  Pvrusha.  ^Afjni,'  the 
Dyu  lohi,  a  kind    of  abode  for  man.     That   Agni  is 


132  MUXDAKOPANISHAD. 

described,  'Samidhah,^  fuel  ;  for  vvhit-h  the  sun  is.  as  it 
were,  a  fuel  ;  for,  it  is  by  the  sun  that  the  Dyu  loka  is 
lighted.  From  the  moon  emeroino-  out  of  the  Dy\i  loka 
paijanya,  the  second  tire,  is  produced  ;  and  from  the 
parjanya,  the  medicinal  plants  proceed,  grow  on  earth  : 
and  from  the  medicinal  plants  offered  to  the  purusha 
fire  serving  as  the  material  cause  the  man  (fire)  sheds 
semen  on  the  Moman  (fire).  Thus  oradualh'  from  the 
parusha  are  prodiiced  many  living  beings  such  as  Brah- 
oiiius,  etc.;  moreover,  the  helps  to  karma  and  their  fruits 
also  proceed  from  the  Puimsha. 

<T^iTT?:=^:  ^m  ?rtf?  ^^  ?titt^  ^W  ^cnt  ^f^^  i 

From  him  the  Rig,  the  Sama,  the  Vajur.  Diksha. 
sacrifices,  all  Kratus,  Dakshina,  the  j'ear,  the  sacrificer 
and  the  worlds  which  the  moon  sanctifies  and  the  sun 
illuminates.  (G) 

Corn. — How  ?  '  Tasmat,''  from  the  Purasha  ;  '  Rlchafi 
the  mantras  whose  letters,  feet  and  endings  are  deter- 
mined and  which  are  marked  liy  Ckhandas  (metre) 
like  the  gayatri.  Sama  with  its  fivefold  aiid  seven- 
fold classification  characteiized  by  stkoha  and  oWwr  gita 
(music).     '  Yajus,''  mantr(fs  in  the  forin    of  sentences. 


WITH    SKI    SANKAKA'S    COMMENTARY.  133 

whose  letters,  feet  and  endings  are  determined  by  no 
rules.  Thus  the  threefold  nuintras.  '  Dikshxi',  res- 
trictions such  as  the  wearino-  of  a  rtioiinjee  (a  kind  of 
cord),  etc.,  imposed  upon  the  })erformer  (of  a  sacrifice). 

*  Yajiuia,^  all  sacrifices  such  as  Agnihotra,  etc.  ^Kratu' 
sacrifices  whicli   recjuire  a   y>tp(i  (i.e.,  sacrificial    })Ost). 

*  Dakshiiuih,^  rewards  distributed  in  sacrifice  from  a 
single  cow  up  to  unbounded  whole  wealth.  'Year,' 
stated  time  as  a  necessary  adjunct  of  laiiina.  '  VajariKiTuC 
the  ])erformer,  i.e.,  the  sacrifices  The  worlds  which 
are  the  fruits  of  liis  karnid  are  next  described  "  whicVi 
the  moon  renders  sacred  and  where  tlie  sun  shines'"; 
these  are  attainable  by  the  northern  and  southern 
routes  and  are  tlie  fruits  of  the  kdriiia  i>erformed  by 
the  knowing'  and  the  ignorant. 

MI«UIMl4V  Jfl^^lt  cfT<«  «»«T  m^  SW=^^  avij^  II  ^  n 

From  him  also  the  devas  are  variously  born,  the 
sadhyas,  the  men,  the  cattle,  the  bird,  the  pi'ana  and 
the  ap(vna,  the  corn  and  yava,  tapaa,  devotion,  truth 
Brahinacharya  and  injunction.  (7) 

Com. — T(i87nat,  'from  him  also,  from  the  purusha. 
'Variously.'  in  various  groups  such  as  vasiiS,  etc.  Sdmyra- 


134  MUNDAKOPANISHAD. 

&utah,  well  bom.  Sadhyas,  a  si)ecies  oi  Devas.  Men 
those  that  are  entitled  to  perform  karma ;  cattle,  both 
of  the  village  and  the  forest.  Vayamsi,  birds.  The 
food  of  men,  etc..  The  Prrtwt  and  the  Apana;  corn 
and  yava,  to  be  used  for  making-  havis  (oblations). 
Tapas,  both  as  an  indispensable  adjunct  to  karina 
whose  efficacy  lies  in  the  purification  of  the  performer  and 
as  an  independent  means  of  attaining  the  fruits  oikarTna. 
Devotion,  that  state  of  inind  which  })recedes  the  mental 
calm  and  a  belief  in  a  future  state  necessary  to  the  ac- 
complishment of  all  human  ends.  Similarly,  truth,  i.e., 
avoiding  falsehood  and  speaking  out  wliat  has  really 
happened,  without  harm  to  others.  Brahmacharyani, 
absence  of  sexual  intercourse.  Injunction,  the  state- 
ment of  what  ought  to  be  done. 

m  ^  ^^r  "^  =^»T^  STRTT  5?T^T  Mf  cTT:  m  m  II  ^  II 

From  him  are  borne  the  seven  j/)YMirt8,  the  seven  flames, 
their  sevenfold  fuel,  the  sevenfold  oblation  and  these 
seven  lokas  where  the  pi'anaf!  move,  seven  and  seven 
in  each  living  being  lying  in  the  cave,  there  fixed.    (8) 

Com. — Again  the  seven  po^anaa,  i.e.,  (organs  of  sense) 
in  the  head  are  born  of  this  purusha  alone.     '  Their 


WITH    SKI    SANKAKA'S   COMMENTARY.  135 

seven  flames,'  their  light  which  enlightens  their  objects. 
Similarly,  the  sevenfold  fuel,  their  sevenfold  objects ; 
for,  it  is  by  these  objects  that  the  jjvawis,  i.e.,  organs 
of  sense  are  fed.  '  The  sevenfold  oblations ',  the  percep- 
tions of  the  sevenfold  objects  ;  for,  another  S^^titi  says  : 
"  He  offers  the  oblation  which  consists  in  the  i)ercep- 
tion  of  the  objects  b}'  the  senses."  The  seven  lokas, 
i.e.,  the  seats  of  the  senses  where  the  j/i'muia  move. 
The  clause  "  where  the  pi^aiuis  move  "  is  intended  to 
exclude  the  vital  airs,  i.e.,  pixtiut,  apctna  and  the  rest. 
'  Lying  in  the  cave,'  lying  during  sleej)  in  the  lx)dy  or 
the  heart.  '  Fixed,'  fixed  by  the  creator.  '  Seven  and 
seven',  in  every  living  thing.  The  meaning  of  the 
context  is  that  all  hit^na  performed  by  knowing  men 
who  propitiate  their  Atman  and  the  fruits  of  such 
karma  as  well  as  the  kaiifna  jjerformed  by  the  igno- 
rant and  their  means  and  fruits  ;  all  these  proceed  only 
from  the  highest  and  the  onmiscient  puruafut. 

From  him  proceed  the  oceans  and  all  the  mountains 
and  the  diverse  rivers  ;  from  him  also,  all  the  medicinal 
plants  and  taste,  by  wliich  encircled  by  the  Bhutas,  i.e.. 


136  MUNDAKOPANISHAD. 

gross  elements,    the  intermediate  Atman,  i.e.,  subtle 
body  is  seated.  (9) 

Com. — '  From  him,'  from  the  purusha.  '  The 
oceans',  all,  the  salt  ocean,  etc.  '  Mountains',  the 
Himalayas  and  the  rest  are  all  from  this  purusha. 
^  Syandante,^  flow.  '  Rivers',  such  as  the  Granfifes. 
■'  Sarvarupah,'  of  many  forms.  From  tliis  purusha, 
also  proceed,  the  medicinal  plants,  such  as  corn,  yava 
paddy,  etc.  '  Taste,'  sixfold  such  as  sweetness,  etc.  'By 
which',  by  which  taste.  '  Bhutaih,^  by  the  five  ^ross 
bhutas.  '  Pariveshtitah%  encircled.  '  Tishthate\  is 
seated.  '  The  internal  At7ruin\  the  subtle  body,  so 
■called,  because  it  is  the  Atman,  as  it  were,  intermediate 
between  the  <>ross  liody  and  the  soul  })roper. 

5^T  '^t  f^^  ^  cT^  ^^  TngrTJI  I 

The  purusha,  alone  is  all  this  universe — Kai'7)ia 
and  Tapas.  All  this  is  Brahman,  the  highest  and 
the  immortal  who  knows  this  as  seated  in  tlie  cavity 
of  the  heart,  unties  the  knot  of  ignorance  even  here. 
Oh  good  U)oking  youth  I  (10) 

Com. —  Thus,  out  o(  purusha,  all  this  is  born  ;  there- 
fore, as  the  Sruti  says    '*  Th<>  name    is  mere    speecli.    a 


WITH    SHI    SANKARA's   COMMENTARY.  137 

modification  and  a  falsehood  and  the  purusfixi  alone  is 
true.  "  Therefore  all  this  is  only  puruaha.  The  uni- 
verse has  no  separate  existence  apart  from  purn^ha. 
Hence  to  the  qu^^stion  propounded  "  0  Bh/igavan,  by 
knowing"  whom,  all  this  becomes  known,"  the  answer 
has  been  gi\en,  i.e.,  when  this  purushi,  the  supreme 
Atmaii,  the  first  cause  is  known,  it  becomes  clear  that 
all  this  universe  is  puriisha  and  nothintj  else  exists 
excejjt  him.  What  then  is  this  "  all,"  it  is  thus  explain- 
ed. Karriia  is  of  the  nature  of  A<jidhotra  and  the  rest. 
Trt//rt8,  knowledge  and  the  fruit  due  to  it.  By  'all' 
this  nuich  is  meant.  And  all  this  is  evolved  out  of 
Brahmum.  Therefore  everything  is  Brahman.  He 
who  knows  that  he  himself  is  this  Brahman  the  high- 
est and  the  immortal  placed  in  the  hearts  of  all  living 
beings,  destroys  the  dense  tendencies  of  ignorance. 
Iha,  even  while  living  .and  not  merely  after  death. 
Soumya,  go(xl  looking. 

o 

Here  ends  the  commentary 

on  the  first   part  of  the 

Second  Mundaka. 


SECOND 
ifluuiiakopanishnj), 


:o: 


PART.  II. 

^TH  IM  ^  II 

Bright,  well-fixed,  movino-  in  the  heart,  great  and 
the  support  of  all ;  in  him  is  all  this  universe  centred, 
what  moves,  breathes  and  winks.  Know  this  which  is 
all  that  has  form  and  all  that  is  formless,  which  is  to 
be  sought  after  by  all,  which  is  beyond  the  reach  of 
man's  knowledge,  and  the  highest  of  all.  (11) 

Com. — It  is  now  explained  how  the  akshara  which 
is  formless,  could  be  known.  A'vihi,  briglit,  shining 
as  the  percipient  of  sound,  etc.,  according  to  the  Sruti, 
"  It  shines  through  its  conditions  of  speech,  etc."  It 
is  seen  in  the  heart  of  all  living  beings  a|)pearing 
there  with  the  attributes  of  seeing,  hearing,  thinking, 
knowing,  etc.  This  Brdhnutn  shining  is  Sannihita,i.e., 
well  seated  in  the  heart.      It  is  celebrated  as  guhacha- 


WITH    SRI    SANKAKA'S    COMMENTARY.  139 

ran  because  it  ino\es  in  the  oa\ity  in  mcxles  of  seeinf:^, 
hearinpf,  etc.  '  Great',  because  it  is  greater  than  all. 
Padam,  reached  by  all,  because  it  is  the  seat  of  all 
objects.  How  is  it  said  to  be  great,  etc  ?  Because  in 
the  Brahrrutn  all  this  universe  is  centred  as  the  various 
spokes  are  in  the  wheel-ring  of  the  chariot.  Ejat, 
moving,  i.e.,  birds,  etc  ;  pvftiut,  l)reatlies,  i.e.,  men, 
cattle, etc.,  Imving  prana,  aparyi,  etc  ;  and'  winks',  all 
that  winks  and  all  that  winks  iiot,  from  the  force  of 
the  particle  cha  ;  this  in  which  all  is  centred,  know,  0 
disciple,  that  that  is  j'our  own  atitum  ;  both  8at  and 
asat  ;  for  without  it,  8((t  and  (laat,  that  which  has  form 
and  that  which  has  not,  i.e.,  the  gross  and  subtle 
do  not  exist.  Varenyam,  covetable  ;  because  of  all 
objects  it  is  the  only  eternal  entity.  Pararit,  distinct 
from,  or,  beyond  ;  this  is  connected  with  the  expression 
"  knowledge  of  men"  though  remote  ;  the  meaning  is 
that  it  is  beyond  the  reach  of  wordly  knowledge. 
Varishtkam,  the  highest  of  all  ;  because  of  all  that  iji 
high,  the  Brahman  is  pre-eminently  high,  being  free 
from  all  faults. 

«^?t  ^TPI  M«  II  "WW 


140  MUNDAKOPANISHAD. 

What  is  brioiit,  what  is  smaller  than  the  small,  in 
what  are  centred  all  the  world  and  those  that  live  in 
them  is  this  immortal  ^rr/Amfm.  That  ifi  prana,  that 
is  speech  and  mind.  That  is  trne  and  immortal ;  ftood 
lookint>-  youth.  Strike  thy  mind  upon  that  which 
should  be  struck  by  the  mind.  (12) 

Com. — Besides  it  is  archmiai,  brioht,  because  it  is 
by  the  lioht  of  the  Brahman  that  the  sun,  etc.,  shine ; 
ao^ain  it  is  subtler  than  the  subtlest  (i.e.,)  £>Tain,  etc. 
From  the  particle  chi,  it  is  su<;gested  that  it  is  bip;i>er 
than  the  biojrest,  such  as  earth,  etc.  Tn  whom  all  the 
worlds  such  as  earth,  etc.,  are  fixed  and  men  and  tlie 
rest,  inhabitants  of  those  worlds  ;  for  all  are  well- 
known  to  depend  ujjon  ''  Intellifyence",  i.  e..  Brah7nan  ; 
this  immortal  Brahman  on  which  all  depend  is  praoui, 
speech,  mind  and  all  the  instruments.  It  is  their 
internal  intellii^ence  for  the  whole  combination  of 
pra'iui,  senses,  etc.,  is  dependent  upon  that  intellioence, 
accordino-  to  the  Srati  '  It  is  t]\^^prana  of  prana,  etc. 
This  immoital  Brahmau  which  is  the  internal  intelli- 
gence of  prana.  etc.,  is  true  and,  therefore,  endless. 
Veddhavyam,  should  be  seized  by  tlie  mind.  The 
meanin<j  is  that  the  mind  should  be  concentrated 
upon  the  Brahman.     This    beini>;  so.    0  <;ood  lookiuij; 


WITH  SHI  sankaha's  commentaky.  141 

youth,    strike    that.  i.e..  coiicHntiate   your  mind   upon 
that  Brahrtum. 

HavinfT  taken  the  bow  furnished  by  the  Upcnnskffds, 
the  oreat  weapon — and  tixed  in  it  the  arrow  rendeied 
pointed  by  constant  meditation  and  havinj^  (hawn  it 
with  the  mind  fixed  on  the  Brahnuin,  hit,  ^ood  lookinir 
youtli  !  at  tliat  mark — the  immortal  Brahman.       (13) 

Com. — How  tliat  is  hit  is  now  exphtined.  Dkanuh, 
tlie  bow.  GHhitva,  ha\in«if  taken.  Upanishdthtnt 
bom  in,  i.e.,  well-known  in  the  Upaaishads.  Maha- 
strarti,  oreat  wea})on,  i.e.,  the  arrow  ;  fix  the  arrow  ;  of 
what  (juality  is  stated.  Upaaanis'itam,  rendered  point- 
ed by  constant  meditation,  i.e.,  purifiefl  ;  after  fixing; 
it  and  drawino-  it,  i.e.,  havintj;  drawn  the  mind  and  the 
senses  from  their  external  objects  and  bendin«',  i.e., 
concentrating-  them  on  the  mark,  for  the  bow  here  can- 
not be  bent  as  by  the  hand;  hit  the  mark — the  im- 
mortal livdhtnun—HWyxi^  defined  with  thy  mind,  Oh 
good  looking^  youth,  engrossed  by  meditation  upon  thi& 
Brahnum. 


142  MUNDAKOPANISHAD. 

■^s^Tm^  >«^?i  ^?^T!^^r  ^^  II  ^  V  II 

The  Prmmva  is  the  how,  the  At7nan  is  the  arrow  and 
the  Brahonan  is  said  to  be  its  mark.  It  slioiild  he  hit 
by  one  who  is  self-collected  and  tliat  which  liits  becomes, 
like  the  arrow,  one  with  the  mark,  i.e..  Brahman.     (14) 

Com. — What  the  bow  and  the  rest  above  referred  to  are, 
is  exi)lained.  The  Pranava,  i.e.,  the  syllable  "  Oin  "  is  the 
bow  ;  as  the  bow  is  the  cause  of  the  arrow  entering-  into 
the  mark,  so  the  syllable  "  Om"  is  the  cause  of  the 
Atvian  enterinoj  into  the  Brahman  ;  for  it  is  only  when 
purified,  by  the  repetition  of  Pranava,  that  the  AtTruin 
supported  by  it  becomes  fixed  in  the  Brahman  without 
obstruction,  as  the  arrow  by  the  force  of  the  bow  is 
fixed  in  the  mark.  Therefore  the  Pranava  is  like  a 
bow.  The  arrow  is  the  ParatiuUman  itself  conditioned 
as  the  Atnum  having  entered  the  body  here,  as  the  sun 
enters  the  water,  as  the  witness  of  all  states  of  con- 
sciousness. That,  like  an  arrow,  is  discharged  towards 
itself — the  immortal  Brahman.  Therefore  the  Brah- 
nnan  is  said  to  l)e  its  mark,  because  it  is  seen  to  be  the 
Atmun  itself  by  those  who  fix  their  mind  ujion  it  as 
on  a  mark.     Tiiis  being  so,  the  Brahman  wliich  is  tlie 


WITH    SlU    SANKARA'S    COMMENTARY.  143 

mark  should  be  liit  by  one  wlio  is  self-collected,  i.  e., 
who  is  free  from  the  excitement  caused  by  a  thirst  to 
get  at  external  objects,  who  is  disgusted  with  every- 
thing, who  has  con(juered  his  senses  and  whose  mind 
is  concentrated.  When  that  is  hit,  the  Atnuiii  becomes 
like  the  arrow,  one  with  the  mark,  i.e.,  the  Brahnum. 
Just  as  tlie  success  of  the  arrow  is  its  becoming  one 
with  the  mark,  so  the  fruit  here  achieved  is  the  Atrnan 
becoming  one  with  the  immortal  Brahviuvn  by  the 
dispelling  of  the  notion  that  the  body,  etc.,  is  the 
Atrruvn. 

He  in  whom  the  heaven,  the  earth,  the  antaHksha 
(sky),  the  mind  with  the  pi'anas  are  centred  ;  know 
him  to  be  the  one  A htuin  of  all ;  abandon  all  other 
speech  ;  this  is  the  road  to  immortality.  (15) 

Com. — As  the  "  Immortal"  cannot  be  easily  grasped 
by  the  mind,  the  rei)etition  is  for  the  jmrpose  of 
making  it  more  easily  cognisable.  He,  the  immorta,! 
Brahman,  in  whom  Dyoith,  earth,  and  antaHksfut  are 
centred,  as  also  the  mind  with  the  other  instruments ; 
know  him,  0   disciples  as  "the  one,"  the  supix)rt  of 


144  MUNDAKOPANISHAD. 

all ;  the  Atniati,  i.e.,  the  internal  principle  of  your- 
selves and  all  livino'  beings ;  haxino'  known  that,  leave 
oflF  all  other  speech  of  the  nature  of  ""  Apara  vidya  "  as 
also  all  Kai'Tiia  with  their  aids  elucidated  by  it ;  for, 
this,  i.  e.,  the  knowledoe  of  the  Atmmi  is  the  road  to 
the  attaintment  of  emancipation,  the  bridoe  as  it  were 
by  which  the  great  ocean  of  Samsara  is  crossed,  as 
another  Sruti  says  "  having-  known  him  thus,  one 
travels  beyond  death ;  there  is  no  other  rotid  to 
emancipation. " 

Wliere  the  nerves  of  the  body  meet  together  as  the 
spokes  in  the  nave  of  a  wheel,  this  xitDiani^  within  it 
variously  bom  ;  meditate  upon  "  Om"  as  the  Atnian. 
May  there  be  no  obstacle  to  yonr  going  to  the  other 
side  beyond  darkness.  (16) 

CoDi. — Within  the  heart  where  all  nerves  running 
through  the  body  meet  together,  as  the  spokes  in  the 
nave  of  the  wheel,  this  Atman,  spoken  of,  dwells  with- 
in, as  the  witness  of  the  states  of  consciousness,  seeing, 
hearing,  thinking,  knowing  and  af^  it  were,  being 
variously  born  by  the  modifications  of  the   mind,  such 


WITH  SHI  SANKARA'S  COMMENTARY.  145 

as  anger,  joy,  etc  ;  men  in  the  world  say  'He  has  become 
angry,  he  has  become  ''joyful  ",  according  to  the 
conditions  of  the  internal  sense  (mind)  ;  meditate 
ni)on  Atman  having  the  syllable  "  Om  "  as  your 
support  and  imagining  as  stated.  And  it  has  been 
said  "  the  jjrecejjtor  who  knows  must  instruct  the 
disciples.  "  The  disciples  are  those  who  being  desirous 
to  .acquire  the  knowledge  of  the  Brahman,  have 
renounced  Karma  and  taken  the  road  to  emancijiation. 
The  prece})tor  gives  his  benediction  that  they  may 
attain  the  Brahiiian  without  hindrance ;  svrtsfi  vah 
paraya,  let  Him  be  without  hindrance  to  your 
reaching  the  other  shore.  Paraatat,  beyond  ;  bej'ond 
what  ?  Beyond  the  darkness  of  ignorance,  i.  e., 
for  the  realisation  of  the  true  nature  of  the  Atman 
devoid  of  ignorance.  He  who  should  be  reached  after 
crossing  the  ocean  of  Samsara  and  who  is  the  subject 
of  the  Para  vidya. 

mcTT^cT:  I 

Tfrq^^rf^  vftn  ^^^^T^rgct  ^^rrf^  II  'i  ^  ii 

This  Atman  who  knows    all    and  all  of    everything 

and  whose  glory  is  so  celebrated  on  earth  is    seated  in 

10 


146  MUNDAKOPANISHAD. 

the  ((has  of  tlie  brioht  city  oi' Brahman.  He  is  condi- 
tioned by  tlie  mind,  is  the  leader  of  the/>ra>w,  and  the 
body  and  is  seated  in  food,  / .  e.,  the  l)ody  fixins;  the 
intelligence  (in  the  cavity  of  their  heart).  The  dis- 
cernino-  people  see  by  means  of  their  superior  knowledge 
on  all  sides  the  atnutn  which  shines,  all  bliss  and  im- 
mortality. (17) 
Com. — Where  He  is.  is  now  ex])lained  ;  the  terms 
'  sarvajita''  and  '  sarvavif  ha\e  already  been  exi)lain- 
ed.  He  is  a,<j;ain  described  ;  by  the  expression  '*  whose 
<;lory  is  this"  is  meant  "  whose  olory  is  celebrated." 
What  is  that  glory  ?  By  whose  commands  stand  sup- 
j)orted  the  earth  and  the  sky,  by  whose  command, 
the  sun  and  the  moon  always  rotate  as  the  Hamino' 
fire-brand.  By  wliose  command  the  rivers  and  the 
seas  do  not  overstej*  their  limits,  whose  command  all 
that  is  moveable  and  immoveable  likewise  obey,  whose 
commands  in  the  same  way,  the  seasons,  the  solstices. 
and  the  years  do  not  transgress  ;  by  whose  commands 
all  kantha,  tiieir  ])erformers  and  their  fruits  do  ii()t 
likewise  go  beyond  their  ai)j)ointed  time  ;  that  is  Jiis 
glory.  lihuvi,  in  the  world.  This  I)ev<(  whose  is  all 
this  glory  and  who  is  omniscient.  J)iv//e,  bright, /.  e., 
illuminated  by  all  the  states  of  consciousness.  Brahma- 


WITH  SKI  SAXKAHA's  COMMENTARY.  147 

pure,  in  the  lotus  of  the  heai-t,  so  called  because  the 
Brahnum  is  always  riianifestiug  himself  there,  in  the 
form  of  intellioenee.  Vt/oruni,  in  the  akfis,  within  the 
cavity  of  the  jieart.  Ife  is  lierceived  (t8  if  seated  there  ;. 
liecause,  otherwise,  motion  to  or  from,  or  fixity  in  a 
place  is  not  possible  for  him  who  is  all-pervadint^  like 
the  ak((,8.  Manoiaa(/((,  because  seated  in  the  heai-t,  he 
is  perceived  only  by  the  modifications  of  the  mind. 
(Thus)  conditioned  by  the  mind.  Leader  of  the  prmui 
and  the  bod}',  because  he  lejids  the  prtitia  and  the 
Ixxly  from  one  ^ross  !x)dy  into  another  bixly.  Prutlsh- 
thitahj  fixed.  Anne,  in  the  fo<:Kl,  /.  e.,  in  the  body 
which  is  a  modification  of  tln»  foinl  eaten  and  whicii 
i;rows  and  decays  day  by  day.  HHckiyaiii, 
intellect.  S((naulh(i(/<f,i\\\u*^ — in  the  cavit}'  of  the 
lotus  ;  for,  the  Atinan  is  really  seated  in  the  heart 
and  not  in  the  food.  Tat,  the  entity  of  the 
Atni((n.  Vijminemi,  i\y  kn()wled^;e,  thorouj^h,  produced 
by  the  teachingis  of  the  sastras  and  the  preceptor,  and 
arising  from  ccmtrol  of  the  mind,  contrt)!  of  the  senses, 
meditation,  complete  renunciation  and  freedom  from  de- 
sire. Paripdsyaidi,  see  on  idl  sides  full.  JJhinih,  the 
discernino-.  A'}l(l}ularltpam,fv^'^'U■o]u  all  dani;:ers,miserie» 
and  troubles.    Vibhati,  shines  nuich  in  one-self  always. 


148  MUNDAKOPANISHAD. 

When  he  that  is  botli  hi^h  and  low  is  seen,  the  knot 
of  the  heart  is  untied  ;  all  donhts  are  solved  ;  and  all 
his  karma  is  consumed.  (18) 

Com. — The  fruit  of  the  knowledge  of  the  Paramat- 
man  is  stated  to  be  the  following.  Loosened  is  "  the 
knot  of  the  heart,"  i.e.,  the  group  of  tendencies  in  the 
mind  due  to  ignorance,  the  desire  which  clings  to  the 
intellect  accoi'ding  to  the  Sruti  "  The  desires  which  lie 
imbedded  in  the  heart,  etc."  This  is  attached  to  the 
heart  (intellect)  not  to  the  Atman.  Bhidyate,  under- 
goes destruction  ;  doubts  regarding  all  knowable 
things  have  their  solution — doubts  which  perplex 
worldly  men  up  to  their  death,  being  (continuous)  like 
the  stream  of  the  Granges  ;  of  the  man  whose  doubts 
have  been  solved  and  whose  ignorance  has  l^een  dis- 
pelled, such  karma  as  was  anterior  to  the  birth  of 
knowledge  in  this  life,  such  as  was  performed  by  him 
in  previous  births  and  had  not  begun  to  bear  fruit  and 
such  as  was  existing  at  the  birth  of  knowledge  come  to 
an  end  ;  but  not  that  karma  which  brought  about  this 
birth,  for  it  had  begun  to  bear  fruit.  He,  "  the  omni- 
scient", not  subject  to  aamsara  ;  '  both  high  and  low,' 


WITH  SKI  SANKAHA's   COMMENTARY.  149 

high  as  beiiijc^  the  cause  and  low  as  being  the  effect ; 
when  he  is  seen  directly  as  "  I  am  he",  one  attains 
emancipation,  tlie  cause  of  samsara  being  up-rooted. 

The  stainh^ss  indivisible  Jhvdiinan,  the  pure,  the 
light  of  all  lights  is  in  the  innermost  sheath  of  golden 
hue.  That  is  what  the  knowers  of  the  Atman  know.  (19) 

CoTii. — The  three  following  texts  briefly  elucidate 
the  meaning  already  expressed.  Hiranmaye,  golden, 
i.e.,  full  of  light,  or  bright  with  intelligence  and 
knowledge.  '  The  highest  sheath',  sheath,  as  it 
were,  of  a  sword  ;  hy/hest,  because  it  is  the  place 
where  "  tlie  Atman  is  realised  as  located"  and 
because  it  is  the  innermost  of  all.  Yirujmu,  free 
from  the  taint  of  ignorance  and  all  other  faults. 
Brahma,  because  it  is  the  greatest  of  all  and 
Atman  of  all.  Niahkalam,  that  from  which  the 
kalaa  had  proceeded,  i.e.,  devoid  of  parts  ;  because 
it  is  untainted  and  devoid  of  jjarts,  therefore  it  is 
subhram  or  pure.  The  light  of  all  lights,  whose  light 
enlightens  even  those  that  illumine  all  other  things 
such  as  lire,  etc.  The  meaning  is  that  the  brightness 
of  even  the  fire,    etc-,    is  due  to  the    splendour    of   the 


150  MUNDAK0PAN18HAI). 

intelligence  oi  the  Brahman  within;  the  light  of  the 
Atiiian  is  the  highest  light  which  is  not  illumined  by 
•other  lights.  'The  knoweis  of  the  atinan\  those  dis- 
<,'erning  men  who  know  the  Self  as  the  witness  of  the 
objective  states  of  consciousness  regarding  sound  and 
the  rest ;  as  it  is  the  highest  light,  it  is  only  those  who 
follow  (are  in)  the  subjective  state  of  consciousness, 
not  others,  who  follow  (are  in)  the  jterceptions  of  ex- 
ternal objects,  that  know  it. 

cT*T^  ^PcTJTg*TTm  ^k  cT^  ^^^^\  ^^'i^i  mnw  ii  ^^  li 

The  sun  shines  not  there,  nor  the  moon  and  the 
stars.  Nor  do  these  lightnings  shine.  How  could 
this  fire?  All  shine  after  him  who  shines.  All  tliis 
is  illumined  by  his  radiance.  (20) 

Com. — How  that  is  the  light  of  all  lights  is  explain- 
ed. The  sun.  though  enlightening  all.  does  not  sliine 
in,  i.e.,  does  not  illumine  the  Brahnuin  wliich  is  his 
Atman;  for,  the  sun  illumines  the  whole  universe 
other  than  the  Atmai)  with  the  light  of  the  Brahman, 
but  has  not  in  himself  the  cajjacity  to  illuminate. 
Similarly  neither  the  moon  and  the  stars  nor  the  light- 
ning shines.  ITow  could  this  tire  which  is  in  the  range 
of  our    vision  ?    Why   dilate  ?     'I'his    universe    which 


WITH  SHI  sankaha's  commkntaky.  151 

shines,  sliiiies  with  tlie  li^ht  of  Him,  tlie  T^ord  of  all, 
wlio  shines  hein<^  liiinself  luminosity.  Just  as  water  and 
the  rest  hy  their  contact  with  fire,  heat  with  the  heat 
of  tlie  fire,  but  not  by  their  own  inherent  i)Ower,  so  all 
this  universe,  the  sun  and  the  rest  shine  with  the  liolit 
of  the  BraJmian.  As  it  is  the  livuhinan  alone  that 
thus  shines  and  shines  with  varjinj^f  li^ht  in  its  diverse 
manifestations,  itself  luminosity,  is  infeiTed  ;  for,  that 
whicli  is  not  itself  lio;ht  cannot  ilhnnine  others  as  we 
see  that  ])ots,  etc.,  do  not  illumine  others  and  that  the 
sun  and  the  rest  liavinj;'  li^ht,  illumine  others. 

All  this  before  is  immortal  Bi'uh'inan;  certainly  all 
behind  is  Brdhiimii ;  all  to  the  south  and  to  the  noith  ; 
all  bellow  and  all  alone  stretched  out,  i.e.,  extended,  all 
this  is  certainly  £ra^'/.>wt?i,  the  liio;hest.  (21) 

Com. —  The  statement.  Brahman  alone  the  li^ht  of 
lights  is  true  and  tliat  all  else  is  only  its  modification, 
a  matter  of  speech  is  a  mere  name  and  falsehood  first 
made  and  logically  demonstrated  at  len^'th  (after- 
wai-ds)  is  affirmed  aijain  as  a  conclusion  by  this 
mantra.  That  which  is  before  us  and  which,  in  the  eyes 
of  the  i«^norant,  appears  to  be  not  Brahman  is  certainly 


152  MUNDAKOPANISHAD. 

Brahman.  Similarly  what  is  behind  us  ;  so,  that 
to  the  south  ;  so,  that  to  the  north  ;  so,  that  below, 
and  that  above  and  all  that  is  extended  everywhere  in 
the  form  of  effect,  appearing  otherwise  than  Brahman 
and  possessed  of  name  and  form.  Why  say  much  ? 
All  this  vast  universe  is  Brahman  certainly.  All  percep- 
tion otherwise  than  as  Brahman  is  mere  ignorance, 
just  as  the  perception  of  a  sequent  in  a  roi)e.  The  de- 
claration of  the  Vedas  is  that  the  one  Brahman  alone 
is  really  true. 


;o: 

Here  ends  the  second  i)art  of  the  second 
Mundaka. 


THIRD 
illunbaliopmu5l]a5, 


PART  I. 


5T  ^^w  H^iTT  H^r=T  ^^J^  i^  qfr^^inrr  i 

Two  inseparable  coiMi)ani()ii.s  of  fine  plumage  perch 
on  the  self-saine  tree.  One  of  the  two  feeds  on  the  de- 
licious fruit.     The  other  not  tasting  of  it  looks  on.      (1) 

Com. — Tiie  Fara  vidyii  has  been  explained,  by  which 
the  inunortal  '  pnrasha^  or  the  Truth  could  be  known, 
by  whose  knowledge  the  cause  of  Sdinsara,  such  as 
the  knot  of  tiie  heart,  etc.,  can  be  totally  destroyed. 
Yoga  which  is  the  means  to  the  realization  of  the 
Brdkniaii  has  also  been  explained  by  an  illustration 
"  taking  the  bow  and  the  rest."  Now  the  subse- 
(pient  portion  is  intended  to  inculcate  the  auxiliary 
helps  to  that  yoga,  as  truth,  etc.  Chiefly,  the  truth 
is  here  determined  by  another  mode,  as  it  is  ex- 
tremely difficult  to  realize   it.     Here,    though    already 


154  MUNDAKOPANISHAD. 

done,  a  vumtrd  (brief)  as  an  aphorism  is  introduced 
for  the  piirpose  of  asc'ei'tainin£>'  tlie  alisohite  entity. 
Suparnau,  two  of  oood  motion  or  two  liirds ;  (the 
■"word  Snparua"  beino-  used  to  denote  birds  <>enerally)  ; 
Sctyujau  inseparable,  constant,  companions ;  Sdhhaynn, 
hearino-  tlie  same  name  or  liavin<j;  tlie  same  cause  of 
manifestation.  Kein^'  thus,  tliey  are  perched  on  the 
same  tree  (*  same,'  because  the  place  where  they  could 
be  perceived  is  identical).  '  Tree  '  here  means  '  body  ;' 
because  of  the  similitude  in  their  liability  to  be  cut 
or  destroyed.  PiirishdsvKJate,  embraced  ;  just  as 
birds  oo  to  the  same  tree  for  tastin*^'  the  fruits.  Tliis 
tree  as  is  well  known  has  its  root  hi^h  up  {i.e.,  in 
Brahman)  and  its  branches  (j/t'ana,  etc..)  downwards  ; 
it  is  transitory  and  has  its  source  in  AvyaJda  (titayd). 
It  is  named  Kshetra  and  in  it  hant>-  the  fruits  of  the 
karma  of  all  living  thin<j;s.  It  is  here  that  the  A  tinan, 
<'onditioned  in  the  subtle  body  to  which  ionorance, 
desire,  karma  and  their  unmanifested  tendencies  clino'. 
and  Isvara  are  j)erched  like  birds.  Of  these  two  so 
])erched,  one,  i.e.,  kshetrajna  occu]>yin«;  the  subth' 
body  eats,  i.e.,  tastes  from  ionorance  the  fruits  of  kamia 
marked  as  hapjaness  and  niisery,  j)alatable  in  many  and 
diversified   modes;  the    other,    i.e.,  the    lord,   eternal. 


WITH    SKI    SANKAHA'S    COMMENTARY,  155 

pure,  inte]li<fent  and  free  in  his  nature,  omniscient 
and  conditioned  ]\v  inaya  does  not  eat ;  for,  lie  is  the 
director  of  both  the  eatei-  and  the  tliinj^  eaten,  by  the 
fact  of  liis  mere  existence  as  the  eternal  witness  (of 
all)  ;  not  tastin^',  he  merely  looks  on  ;  for,  his  mere 
iriinefifiiiuj  is  direction,  as  in  the  case  of  a  kinp;. 

On  the  self  same  tree,  the  Jivn  drowned  as  it  were 
und  peri)lexed,  grieves  owin^;  to  hel]>lessness,  But 
when  he  sees  the  other,  the  lord  who  is  worshi])i)ed  by 
all,  and  his  j^lory,  he  l>ecomes  absolved  from  ^rief.      (2) 

Gmti. — In  this  state  of  things,  the  Jiva^  i.e.,  the 
•enjoj-er  occui)yin<>  the  body  as  above  described,  under 
the  heavy  load  of  ignorance,  desire  and  thirst  for  the 
fruits  of  J\((riiu(,  etc.,  sinks  down  like  a  i>ottle-«^ourd  in 
the  waters  of  the  sea,  is  c(mvinced  lieyond  doubt  that 
the  ])ody  is  the  atni<(i(  and  thinking  that  he  is  the  son 
of  this  man  or  the  <;reat-^randson  of  that,  lean  or  stout, 
with  or  without  <>;ood  (|ualities,  is  enjoying  or  suffering;, 
and  that  there  is  none  but  him,  is  boiTi,  dies,  is  united 
with  and  })arted  from  relations  and  kinsmen  ;  therefore, 
he  orieves  from  helj)lessness  thus  :  '*  I  am  <^ood  for 
nothino' ;  I  ha\e  lost  my  son  ;  my     wife  is  dead  ;     what 


156  MUNDAKOPANISHAD. 

avails  my  life"  and  so  forth  and  is  subject  to  anxiety 
from  ignorance  owing  to  numerous  kinds  of  troubles  ; 
but  when  thus  constantly  degenerating  in  births,  of 
pi'etas,  beasts,  men  and  the  like,  he  Imppens,  owing 
to  the  result  of  pure  deeds  stored  up  in  many 
(previous)  births  to  be  instructed  in  the  path  of  Yoga 
by  some  preceptor  sur})assingly  compassionate  and 
being  qualified  by  abstinence  from  giving  pain,  truth 
speaking,  continence,  complete  renunciation  and  con- 
trol over  the  internal  and  external  senses  and  with  his 
mind  concentrated,  finds  by  dint  of  meditation,  the 
other  who  is  approached  by  different  paths  of  Yoga 
and  by  the  followers  of  Karma  distinct  from  him, 
conditioned  in  the  body,  not  subject  to  the  bondage  of 
Samsara,  unaffected  by  hunger,  thirst,  grief,  ignorance, 
decay  and  death  and  lord  over  all  tlie  universe  and 
thinks  thus  :  "  I  am  the  at'iuan,  alike  in  all,  seated  in 
every  living  thing  and  not  the  other,  the  illusory  atmaiiy 
enclosed  under  conditions  created  by  ignorance  and  this 
glory — this  imiverse  is  mine,  the  lord  of  all."  then  he 
becomes  absohed  from  grief,  i.e.,  is  released  entirely 
from  the  ocean  of  grief,  i.e..  his  object  is  accomplished. 


WITH  SKI  SANKARA'S  COMMENTARY.  157 

Wlien  tlie  seer  sees  liim  of  golden  line,  the  creator, 
lord,  Furvshd,  and  the  source  of  (Apara)  Brahma, 
then  the  knower.  havin<>  shaken  off  all  deeds  of  merit 
and  sin,  attains  supreme  equality,  being-  untouched 
with  stain.  (3) 

Com. — Another  mantra  also  conveys  the  same 
meaning  at  length.  Yada,  when  ;  Pasyaha,  one 
who  sees,  i.e.,  a  learned  man,  i.e.,  a  man  of  prac- 
tice. Rukniavarnam,  of  self-resplendent  nature, 
or,  of  imi)erishable  brightness  as  that  of  gold. 
*  Creator,'  of  all  the  universe;  *  Brahma  yonim' 
the  Brahman  who  is  the  source  of  the  mani- 
fested Brahman.  When  he  sees  the  Brahman  thus, 
then  the  learned  man  shaking  off,  or  burning  away 
good  and  bad  deeds,  forming  a  bondage  to  their  root 
and  being  unaffected,  i.e.,  freed  from  grief,  attains 
that  supreme  equality  which  is  identity  with  the 
Brahman.  The  equality  in  matters  involving  duality 
is  certainly  inferior  to  this. 

^TcR^T^  ^TcJTTIcr:  ^^TT^m  ^^f^  im'-  II  ^  II 
This  is,  indeed,  Pran/(,i.  e.,  /swent, shining  variously 
with  all  living  beings.     Knowing  him,  the  wise   man 
becomes  not  a  talker  regarding  anj'thing  else.  Sporting 


1.58  MrXDAKOl'AMSHAD. 

in  self.  (U'liiilited  in  self  ;ni(l  (loin;^-  nets  (enjoined)^ 
tliis  man  is  the  best  of  those  who  know  the  Brah- 
'man.  (4) 

Cmn. — A^j^ain  tin's  Tsi'dra  is  the  j/t'anH  of  prdua^ 
This,  now  treated  of.  '  All  living-  thinos,'  from  the 
Brah'nian  down  to  the  woiju.  The  instrnjnental  case 
in  "  S'(rvahhitt((ih"  has  the  force  of  "  thns  become," 
The  meanini;'  is  '  existinii  in  all  living  things,  i.e.,  the 
((tnifdi  of  i\]].^  Vibhati,  shines  varionsly.  The  man  of 
knowledi;*^  who  directly  realises  Him  who  is  in  all 
thinfi^s  as  his  own  Atncdu  and  thinks  *'  1  am  he"  does 
not  become  an  ativadin.  merely  by  the  knowled<;-e  of 
the  import  of  the  rit<(h(iv<iky(i.  Ativddi,  means  one 
whose  natnre  is  to  talk  of  all  other  things  more,  when 
he  sees  that  all  is  the  Atnidn  and  nothing'  else  exists  ; 
how  then  could  he  talk  of  anythini;  else.  It  is  (mly 
where  one  sees  anything'  else,  he  could  well  talk  of 
that  ;  but  this  man  of  knowledge  sees,  hears  and  knows 
none  other  than  the  Atiiyiii  ;  so.  lie  is  not  a  talker  of 
anythini;'  else.  A^aiu.  lu^  is  an  <itiu<(kriddh,  i.e..  one 
whose  >;])ort  is  within  his  own  AtuKdi  and  not  elsewhere, 
such  as  son.  wife,  etc.  Sijnilarlv,  he  is  ((irnar<UiJt,  i.e. 
one  who  delights  or  revels  in  his  own  Atiiidx.  The  term 
/^v?VZu or  ])lay  re(|uires  some  ('xternal  help.    Hut   delioht 


MUNDAKOPAMSffAD.  loi> 

or  revellinfj  does  not  recjuire  any  exteniHl  liel})  hut 
indicates  merely  the  attachment  to  an  external  olyect. 
This  is  the  distinction.  Similarly,  kriynvnn,  i.e., 
one  whose  activity  consists  in  knowled«>;e,  jneditation,. 
freedom  from  desire,  etc.  Hut  if  the  reading  he 
"  (d'liKiratikriyavan  "  (a  compound)  the  meaninj^  is  he- 
whose  activity  is  mere  deli<;ht  in  iiinri ;  as  l>et\veen  the 
Bahuvri/d  and  the  *'  'nuttup  "  endinii',  one  is  sufficient 
without  the  other  ;  hut  some  contend  that  the  single 
com])oun(l.  denotes  a  comhination  of  hoth  karma,  i.e., 
A(/iti/iotr(('  and  the  rest,  and  the  knowledoe  of 
Brahmiau.  It  is  not  ]»ossil)le  for  one  to  he  play- 
ing; with  external  ohjects  and  at  the  same  time  to 
he  delighted  in  self.  It  is  only  the  man  who  has 
turned  away  from  extrrnal  activity  that  hecomes 
d('lii;hted  in  self;  fou,  external  ai'tixity  and  delighted  in 
itself  aie  opposed  to  each  otlici'  ;  for,  it  is  not  possihle 
that  darkness  and  li^ht  could  exist  in  the  same  place. 
Therefore,  the  statement  that  a  condonation  of  karhia 
and  knowledge  is  inculcated  hy  this  text  is  certainly 
the  ]irattle  of  tht^  ignorant.  This  also  follows  from 
the  ISi'ictis  "  Leave  otf  from  all  other  speech  ''  and  "  hv 
renimciation  of  Kuriita,  etc."  Therefore,  he  alone  is 
"  kriyava/i'^   whose    actixifv     (•on>i>ts    in    knowledge. 


% 

160  WITH    SRI    kSANKARA'S   COMMENTARY. 

meditation,  etc.,  and  who  ii^a  Sanyasin  not  transoress- 
ingthe  limits  of  proliibitoiy  injunctions.  Such  a  man 
as  is  not  an  ativadin,  as  sports  in  his  own  self,  as  deliolits 
in  himself  and  as  is  a  Kriyavan  (whose  activity  is 
aforesaid)  is  the  first  among  all  the  knowers  of  Brahman- 

^?cT:^fT>  ^fcTW  ff  5I^r  ^  T^f^  TcT?t:  ^mCw:  II  y,  ii 
This  Atinan  witliin  tlie  body,  resplendent  and  pure, 
can  be  reached  by  truth  and  tapas,  by  sound  know- 
ledge and  by  abstinence  from  sexual  pleasures  constant- 
ly practised  ;  he  is  within  the  body,  resplendent  and 
pure ;  him,  assiduous  Sanyasins  see,  their  faults 
removed.  (5). 

Com. — Now  truth  and  the  rest  chiefly  characterized 
by  restraint  are  enjoined  upon  a  hhikshii,  i.e.,  mendi- 
cant, as  auxiliary  aids  ^ith  sound  knowledge ;  he 
should  be  attained  by  truth,  i.e.,  by  abstaining  from 
falsehood ;  as  also  by  tapas,  i.e.,  by  concentration  of 
the  senses  and  the  mind,  which  is  declared  to  be  the 
highest  tapas ;  for,  it  is  this  which  is  of  greatest  liel j», 
as  it  is  turned  towards  beholding  the  Atnum,  not  the 
other  forms  of  ffrjiws,  such  as  the  ]»erfonriance  of  the 
chandrayana  (a  penance),  etc.  "  Tbis  Atmau  should 
be  attained  "  should   be   read    into  every  clause.      '  Hy 


WITH    SKI    SANKAHA'S   COMMENTARY.  161 

good  knowledge ',  by  beholding  the  Atman  as  it  really 
is.  '  By  Brahriiacharya,^  by  abstinence  from  sexual 
pleasure.  NityctTti,  always.  The  word  "  always  '* 
should  be  read  with  every  one  of  the  words  '  truth/ 
'  tapas,''  etc.  Just  as  a  lanij)  within  a  building  illu-- 
mines  every  part  of  it,  it  will  be  said,  later  on,  that 
they  seethe  Atm(in  in  whom  there  is  neither  deceit^ 
nor  falsehood,  nor  cunning.  Who  this  Atnuiii  is  that 
should  be  attained  by  these  aids  is  explained.  '  Within 
the  body,'  in  the  midst  of  the  body,  i.e.,  in  the  akas  of 
the  lotus  of  the  heart.  '  Resplendent',  of  golden  hue. 
Subhra,  pure.  The  yatayah,  i.e.,  those  who  are  habit- 
ually seeking,  i.e.,  the  Scmyamis,  'their  faults  removed, *" 
i.e.,  devoid  of  all  taint  of  mind  such  as  anger,  etc.,  find 
this  atman.  The  drift  is  tliat  tlie  atTnan  is  attained, 
by  Sanyaaiiis  with  these  aids  as  truth,  etc.,  constantly 
practised  and  cannot  be  attained  by  them  occasionally 
practised.  This  text  is  a  eulogy  of  such  aids  as 
truth,  etc. 

m^^^  ^^^fr\  ^^^  h^^  t^^t  f%?mT  ^?jr:  i 

Truth  alone  wins,  not  falsehood  ;  by  truth,  the  De- 
vayanah  (the  path  of  the  Devas)  is  widened,  that  by 
which  the  seers  travel  on,  having  nothing  to  wish    for 

11 


162  MUNDAKOPANISHAD. 

to  where  there  is  that — the   hiohest   treasure    attained 
by  truth,  (6) 

Com. — Truth  alone,  i.e.,  he  who  speaks  the  truth 
alone,  wins  ;  not  he  who  utters  falsehood,  for  there  can 
be  neither  victory  nor  defeat  between  abstract  truth  and 
falsehood  where  they  do  not  clino-  to  men.  It  is  well 
known  in  the  world  that  he  who  utters  falsehood  is  de- 
feated by  him  who  speaks  the  truth  ;  not  the  converse- 
Therefore,  it  is  establislied  that  truth  is  a  strong'  auxi- 
liary ;  again,  the  superiority  of  truth  as  an  aid  is  also 
known  from  the  sastras;  how  ?  It  is  only  by  truth,  i.e., 
by  a  determination  to  speak  what  had  occurred,  the 
road  named  "  Devayanah"  (the  way  of  the  gods)  is  wid- 
ened ;  i.e.,  is  kept  up  continually ;  by  which  road, 
seers  free  from  deceit,  delusion,  fraud,  pride,  vanity 
and  falsehood  and  having  no  desires,  go  about  to  where 
the  absolute  truth,  the  highest  treasure  covetable  by 
man  and  attainable  by  the  important  aid,  trutli,  exists. 
The  exjiression  "  where  the  greatest,  etc.,"  is  connected 
with  the  preceding  clause  "  the  road  by  which  they  go 
is  widened  by  truth."  What  that  is  and  what  its 
characteristics  are,  will  be  ex})lained. 


WITH  SKI  SANKARA'S  COMMENTARY.  163 

That  sliiiies  as  vast,  heavenly,  of  unthinkable  form 
and  subtlei-  than  the  subtle,  much  farther  than  the  dis- 
tant, near,  also  here,  and  seen  fixed  in  the  cavity,  by 
the  intelligent.  (7) 

Com. —  The  Bralcman  now  treated  of  and  attainable 
by  truth,  etc.,  is  vast,  because  it  is  all-pervading' ; 
'  heavenly, '  self-luminous  and  iniperceivable  by  the 
senses.  Therefore  alone,  is  it  that  its  form  is  unthink- 
able ;  it  is  subtler  than  even  the  subtle,  such  as  the 
akas  and  the  rest  ;  for,  beinji  the  cause  of  all,  it  is  of 
unsur}mssino-  subtlety.  Vibhdti,  shines  diversely,  i.e., 
in  various  forms  such  as  that  of  the  sun,  the  moon,  etc. 
Again  it  is  farther,  even  from  the  most  distiint  i)lace8  ; 
for,  the  Brahtmin  cannot  be  in  the  least  approached  by 
the  ignorant.  It  is  also  near,  i.e.,  in  the  body 
itself;  because,  it  is  the  atiiian  of  those  who  know  and 
because  it  is  within  all,  from  the  SruU  which  declares 
it  to  be  even  within  the  akas.  '  In  those  who  see,' 
among  the  intelligent  men.  '  Fixed,'  seated,  i.e., 
seen  by  yof/is,  as  possessed  of  the  activity  of  seeing,  etc. 
Where  ?  in  the  cavity,  i.e.,  in  the  intellect  ;  for,  it  is 
seen  as  lodged  there  by  those  who  know  ;  still,  though 
lodged  there,  it  is  not  seen  by  the  ignorant,  as  it  is 
veiled  by  ignorance. 


164  MUNDAKOPANISHAD. 

^HM«I<T  f^5i?ef^cTcT^5  cT  T^^  f%^^^  ^^1^^J^:  II  ^  II 
He  is  not  grasped  by  the  e5'e  ;  nor  by  speech  ;  nor 
by  other  senses  ;  nor  by  ta/pas  ;  nor  by  hamna  ;  when 
one's  mind  is  purified  by  tlie  clearness  of  knowledge, 
then  alone  he  sees  the  indivisible  (BraJmimi)  by  con- 
templation. (8) 
Corn. — Again,  a  special  aid  to  the  attainment  of 
Brahman  is  explained.  It  is  not  seen  by  the  eye  of 
anybody,  because  it  has  no  form  ;  nor  is  it  grasped  by 
speech,  because  it  cannot  be  the  subject  of  words  ;  nor 
by  the  other  senses.  Though  tapas  is  an  aid  to  the 
attainment  of  all,  the  Brahman  cannot  be  reached  by 
Karma  enjoined  by  the  Veda,8,  such  as  agnihotra  and 
the  rest  though  their  greatness  is  well  known.  What, 
then,  is  the  means  by  which  it  could  be  grasped  is 
explained.  Giuitut  p^'asadenci,  though  the  intellect  in 
all  men  is  by  nature  comi)etent  to  know  the  Atimin, 
still  being  polluted  by  such  faults,  as  love  for  external 
objects,  etc.,  and  hence  unclear  and  impure,  it  does  not, 
like  a  stained  mirror  and  muddy  water,  grasp  the 
entity  of  the  Atman  thougii  always  near  ;  but  when,  by 
removalof  the  polluting  taint,  such  as  desire,  etc.,  pro- 
duced by  contact  with   the  objects   of  the  senses,  it  is 


WITH    SRI    SANKAKA'S    COMMENTARY.  165 

made  clear  and  calm  like  mirror  and  water,  then  the 
intellect  becomes  clear  ;  by  this  clearness  of  the  intellect 
the  mind  is  purified  and  the  man  becomes  competent 
to  realize  the  Brahman.  Therefore,  he  sees  the  At7)ian 
which  has  no  jjarts,  by  meditation,  having  recourse  to 
such  hel])s  such  as  truth,  etc.,  having  controlled  his 
senses  and  with  a  concentrated  mind. 

This  subtle  Atiiytn  should  be  known  by  the  mind 
as  being'  in  the  Ixxiy,  whose  pi'aiut  entered  in  five 
different  forms  ;  the  mind  in  all  creatures  is  jiervaded 
hy  theae  pi'amis.  When  it  is  jiurified,  then  tht^  Atman 
shines  out  of  itself.  (9) 

Co7n. — This  Atnum,  who  is  thus  seen,  is  subtle  and 
should  be  known  by  the  mind,  i.e.,  by  the  mere  in- 
tellect purified.  Where  is  this  Atman  ?  In  the  body 
which,  prana  in  five  different  forms,  has  well  entered. 
The  meaning  is  ;  he  should  be  known  by  the  mind  as 
existing  in  the  body,  i.e.,  in  the  heart ;  by  mind,  how  cir- 
cumstanced should  he  be  known,  is  explained ;  mind  in 
all  creatures  is  j)ervaded  by  the  j/ranas  and  the  senses, 


166  MUNDAKOPANISH  AD. 

as  milk  by  oil,  and  fuel  by  fire.  The  mind  in  all 
livina;  beings  is  well  known  in  the  world,  to  be  possessed 
of  intelligence  ;  when  the  mind  is  purified,  i.e.,  freed 
from  the  taint  of  grief,  etc.,  then  this  Atman  above- 
defined  shines  out,  shows  itself  out,  by  itself. 

?r  ^  ^m  3PTW  cTt^  ^TRr^rlirHKIcJTf'   SI^^^Id+IM:  II  ^  »  II 

Whatever  worlds  he  covets  by  his  mind,  and  what- 
ever objects  he  wishes  for  the  man  of  pure  mind,  he 
gains  those  worlds  and  those  objects  ;  therefore,  let  him 
who  longs  for  Bhuti  (manifested  power)  worship  him 
who  knows  the  atman.  (10) 

Com. — This  text  explains  that  the  man  who  identi- 
fies the  atman  of  all  with  his  own,  obtains  as  the  fruits 
thereof,  all  that  he  longs  for  ;  because  of  the  fact  that 
he  is  the  Atman  of  all.  Whatever  worlds,  i.e.,  such  as 
those  of  the  manes  and  the  rest,  he  covets  either 
himself,  or  for  others,  or  whatever  enjoyments 
he  wishes  for  the  man  of  ])ure  mind  who  is 
free  from  all  grief  and  who  knows  the  Atmaiij 
he  obtains  those  worlds  and  those  t^njoy- 
ments.     Therefore,    i.e.,    because   the    wislies   of  the 


WITH    SKI    SANKARA's    COMMENTARY.  167 

knower  of  the  Attnan  are  always  realised  ;  let  one  who 
longs  for  vibhutis  propitiate  the  knower  of  the  AtrtiaUy 
whose  mind  is  purified  by  such  knowledge,  by  clean- 
ing his  feet  with  water,  personal  service,  prostration 
and  the  rest ;  tlierefore,  he  is  worthj'  of  worship. 


-:o:- 


Here  ends  the  first   part  of 
the  Third  Mundaka. 


-:o:- 


THIRD. 
illunbaliopaiusl)o5. 


-o- 


PART    II, 

— :o: — 

H  ^TcTcTTJt  5r?I  vrm  ?T^  f^^  T%f|ct  *TT%  S^JJ  | 
^TTH^  5^?  %  5I^mT^  5^>cT^%^cTf?cT  qKT:  IM  =1  II 
He  knows  tlie  highest  Brah7iian,  the  place  where  all 
this  universe  rests,  and  which  shines  with  clear  bright- 
ness. The  intelligent,  who,  free  from  all  desire,  worship 
this  man,  travel  beyond  this  seed.  (11) 

Com. — As  he  knows  the  Brahman  above  defined,  the 
highest  of  all,  the  place  where  all  desires  rest,  where 
all  the  universe  rests  and  which  shines  purely  by  its 
own  light,  the  intelligent,  who  free  from  yearning  for 
vibhuti  and  with  a  desire  for  emancipation,  worship 
even  this  man  as  the  highest,  travel  beyond  tliis  seed, 
i.e.,  the  material  cause  of  embodied  existence,  i.e.,  are 
never  born  again  of  the  womb,  according  to  the 
Sruti,  '  He  does  not  like  any  abode.'  The  meaning 
is  that  one  should  worshij)  such  a  knower. 


AVITH  SHI  SANKAHA'S  COMMENTARY.  169 

^iqtv^:  ^^^^  x^T^^:  H  ^mf^^i!^^  <T^  a^  I 

He,  who  broods  on  and  longs  for  objects  of  desire,  is 
born  there  and  there  with  sucli  desires  ;  but  of  him 
whose  desires  have  been  fulfilled  and  who  has  realised, 
the  At7iian,  the  desires  end  even  here  (in  this 
world).  (12) 

Co7n. — This  text  shows  that  the  primary  hel]i  to 
liim  who  is  desirous  of  emancipation  is  the  renimcia- 
tion  of  all  desire,  lie  who  covets  visible  or  invisible 
objects  of  desire,  broodinj^  on  their  virtues  is  born 
H<j;ain  and  apvin  with  those  desires  of  external  objects 
which  are  incentive  to  the  performance  of  good  and  bad 
deeds.  Wherever  his  desires  direct  him  to  j)erform 
karnut  for  the  realisation  of  their  objects,  he  is  bom 
with  those  self-saiue  desires  in  those  objects.  But  of 
him  wlio  from  a  sound  knowledge  of  the  absolute  truth 
has  all  his  desires  fulfilled,  because  the  Atman  is  the 
objectof  his  desireand  whose  Atinan  through  knowledge 
has  been  made  to  assume  its  highest,  i.  e.,  true  form  by 
the  removal  of  the  lower  form  imposed  on  it  by  igno- 
rance, all  desires  impelling  him  to  do  meritorious  and 
sinful  deeds  are  destroyed   even    while    his  bod}'   lasts. 


170  MUNDAKOPANISHAD. 

The  drift  is  that  desires  do  not  spring  up,  because    the 
causes  of  their  rising  are  destroyed. 

This  ^-li»i,aii,  cannot  be  attained  by  dint  of  study  or 
intelligence  or  much  hearing — whom  he  wishes  to 
attain — by  that  it  can  be  attained.  To  him  this 
Atmaii  reveals  its  true  nature.  (13) 

Com. — If  thus  the  realisation  of  the  attnan  is  the 
greatest  gain  of  all,  it  may  be  thought  that  means  such 
as  study,  etc.,  should  be  largely  employed  for  its 
attainment.  This  text  is  intended  to  dispel  that 
notion.  This  atmau  which  has  been  explained  and 
whose  realisation  is  the  highest  object  of  human  desire 
cannot  be  attained  by  means  of  much  study  of  the 
Ved(i8  and  the  Sastras.  Similarly  not  by  intelligence, 
i.e.,  by  a  retentive  memory  of  the  purport  of  writings; 
nor  by  much  heard,  i.e.,  by  nuich  hearing.  By  what 
then  could  the  J. i«irt7i  be  attained 'is  explained.  The 
Paramatman  wliom  this  knower  wishes  to  attain,  by 
that  seeking  alone  can  that  Brahman  be  attained ;  not 
by  any  other  means,  because  his  nature  is  always 
attained.  What  is  the  nature  of  this  knower's  attain- 
ment of  the  ^iZ/y/y^y?  is  ex])lained.     As  pot,    etc.,  reveals 


WITH  SKI  SANKAKA'S  COMMENTARY.  171 

its  form  where  there  is  li^ht,  so  does  the  Atman 
concealed  by  ig;norance  reveal  his  true  nature  when 
there  is  knowledge.  The  drift  is  the  wish  for  the 
realisation  of  the  Atrtum  after  renouncing  all  others  is 
alone  the  means  to  the  attainment  of  the  Atman. 

This  Ahnan  cannot  be  attained  by  one  devoid  of 
strength  or  by  excitement  or  by  tapas  devoid  of  liiufa- 
But  of  the  knower  who  strives  with  tiiese  aids,  the 
Atman  enters  into  the  Brahiiuin.  (14) 

Com. — Combined  with  the  wish  to  realise  the  Atman, 
strength,  absence  of  excitement,  and  knowledge  coui)led 
with  Sanyaaa  are  helps  ;  because  this  Atman  cannot 
be  attained  by  one  devoid  of  strength  produced  by 
concentration  on  the  Atman  or  by  excitement  caused 
by  associating  with  objects  of  the  world,  as  son,  cattle 
and  the  rest,  or  by  tapaa  devoid  of  linga.  '  Tapas'  here 
means  '  knowledge.'  "  Liiiga"  means  "  Sanyaaa." 
The  meaning  is  that  the  Atman  cannot  be  attained  by 
knowledge  without  Sanyaaa.  But  of  the  knower  who^ 
with  these  aids,  strength,  absence  of  excitement,  San- 
yaaa and  knowledge — strives  intent  after  the  Atman, 
the  Atm(tQi  enters  its  abode,  the  Brahman. 


172  MUNDAKOPANISHAD. 

^^n^^gwr  ITRcJ^T:  ^cTTc^RT  fRTTTTT:  IT^IPcTT:  I 

Havintj;  attained  Him,  the  seers  content  with  tlieir 
knowledji^e,  their  purpose  accomplished,  free  from  all 
desire,  and  with  full  composure,  havin<^'  attained  tlie 
all-pervadiui^  Atman  on  all  sides,  ever  concentrated  in 
their  minds,  enter  into  everj'^thino.  (15) 

Com. — How  they  enter  into  Brahman  is  explained. 
Havinc^  known  him  well,  the  seers  content  with  that 
knowledjre  and  not  by  any  external  means  of  delight 
tendinis  to  the  orowth  of  their  body,  their  Atviaii 
havincf  become  one  with  the  Paramatman,  free  from 
the  fault  of  desire,  etc.,  their  senses  sulxlued,  having- 
attained  him  all  pervadiui;-  like  the  akas  on  all  sides, 
i.  e.,  not  in  any  particular  place  limited  by  conditions 
(what  then  do  they  attain  ?  The  Brahman  itself,  one 
and  without  a  second  as  their  own  Atman),  beinj; 
di8cernin<j  and  with  concentrated  minds  enter  into 
<^verythin<>;  when  their  body  falls,  i.e.,  cast  off  all 
limitaticms  imposed  by  ignorance,  as  the  akas  in  the 
pot  when  the  pot  is  broken.  Thus  do  the  Knowers  of 
Brahriutn  enter  into  Brahman  abode. 

^TT^cTf^^rr^'gfjTf^m^:  ^•^i^'Ti'iiyd^r.  5|«rHf^:  i 

^  sTSI^T^  TH^^M  TrrgcTT:  Tf^g^^T^^T  ^f  II  '\\  II 


WITH  SRI  SANKARA'S   COMMENTARY.  173 

Havin*;'  without  doubt  well  ast'ertained  the  signifi- 
cance of  the  knowledi^e  of  Yeddnta  the  seekers,  their 
minds  puiified  by  dint  of  renunciation,  attain  the 
worlds  of  the  Brahman  and  when  their  body  falls,  their 
Atman  beino;  one  with  the  hip;hest  ininuntal  Brtthman 
are  absolved  all  round.  (16) 

Gomi. — Having  without  doubt  determined  the  object 
of  the  knowledj^e  of  Vedaiita,  i.e.,  that  Brahman  should 
be  known,  the  seekers,  their  minds  purified  by  dint  of 
renunciation  of  all  karma  and  by  being  centred  in  the 
pure  Brahman,  attain  tlie  worlds  of  the  Brahiuaa  at 
the  end  of  aamsara,  which  for  the  seekers  after  emanci- 
|>rttion  corresponds  to  the  time  of  death  of  those  rotat- 
ing in  aamsara.  As  men  who  seek  emanci])ation  are 
many,  tlie  world  of  Brahman,  though  one,  appears 
to  be  many  or  is  reached  as  many  ;  so,  the  plural  num- 
ber '  worlds  of  the  Brahman^  is  used.  Brahman 
being  the  world  reached,  the  expression  '  in  the  worlds 
of  the  Brahman^  means  '  in  Brahman.''  Paramintahy 
they  whose  atman  has  become  the  highest  immortal, 
i.e.,  Brahman.  They  become  the  highest  and  immortal 
Brahnuim  even  during  life  and  are  absolved  in  all  sides 
like  a  lamj)  that  has  gone  out  and  like  the  akas  in  the 
pot,   i.e.,    they    have    no     need  of    any    otlier   place 


174  MUNDAKOPANISHAD. 

to  ii'o  to  ;  for,  the  Sruti  and  tlie  Srtiriti  say  "  as 
the  footmark  of  birds  in  the  air  and  tliat  of 
aquatic  animals  in  water  are  not  seen,  so  the 
track  of  the  knowing-  men  "  and  they  oo  by  no  road, 
who  would  reach  the  ends  of  the  roads  of  samsant. 
]Motion  limited  by  place  is  only  in  sanisara,  because 
it  is  accomplished  by  means  limited ;  but  as  the 
Brahman  is  all,  it  cannot  be  reached  in  a  limited  s])ace  ; 
if  the  Brahman  were  limited  in  respect  of  place,  it 
would  like  a  substance  ha^■in^  form,  have  a  beoinning 
and  an  end,  be  dependent  on  another,  composed  of 
parts,  non-eternal  and  be  a  i)roduct.  But  the  BrahTiian 
cannot  be  like  that ;  so,  its  attainment  too,  cannot  be 
limited  by  conditions  of  place. 

»tcTt:  q=r^:  qsr^  irfrT^T  ^^  b^  vifri^^dig  i 

The  fifteen /crt/«-s  ^o  back  to  their  source;  all  the 
powers  seated  on  the  senses  oo  back  to  their  corres- 
ponding deities  and  all  his  karma  and  the  atman,  all 
these  become  one,  in  the  hiohest  and  iinperishable 
Brahirum.  (17) 

Com.. — Moreover,  the  knowers  of  Brahrtian  regard 
emancijMition  as  consisting  only  in  the  release  from 
bondage,  samsara,    ignorance  and    the    rest    not  as 


WITH  SHI  saxkaka's  commentaky.  175 

soinethinj;-  produced.  Besides  at  tlie  time  of  emanci- 
pation the  kalas  which  produce  tlie  body,  pranaa 
etc.,  go  back  to  their  own  se«at,  i.e.,  cause.  The 
word  '  Pratishtha^  is  accusative  plural.  Fifteen: 
fifteen  in  number  already  enumerated  in  the  last 
pivisna  and  well  known.  Devas,  the  powers  adhering 
to  the  body,  and  lodged  in  the  senses  such  as  the  eye, 
etc.  ;  all  these  go  to  the  corresponding  deities  such  as 
the  sun,  etc.  ;  also  those  actions  of  the  seeker  after 
emancipation  which  have  not  begun  to  bear  fruit  (for 
those  which  have  begun  to  bear  fruit  can  1^  consumed 
only  by  enjoyment)  and  the  Atman  limited  by  the 
intellect,  i.e.,  who,  mistaking  the  condition  of  the 
intellect  so  caused  by  ignorance  for  the  Atman,  has 
here  entered  into  various  lx)dies  like  the  image  of  the 
sun,  etc.,  into  water,  etc.  (Karma  being  intended  for 
the  benefit  of  the  Atriian).  Therefore  ^  ViJTtanamaya' 
means  '  chiefly  possessed  of  intellect.'  These  and  the 
Vijnananuiya  Atrnan,  after  removal  of  the  conditions 
imposed,  become  mingled  as  one  in  the  Brahman,  the 
highest,  the  imperishable,  endless,  indestructible,  all- 
pervading  like  the  akas,  unborn,  undecaying,  immortal, 
beneficent,  fearless,  having  neither  before  nor  after,  nor 
in,  nor  out,  without  a  second,  unconditioned,  lose  their 


176  MUNDAKOPANISHAD. 

distinctive  features,  i.e.,  become  one  as  the  ima»;es  of 
the  sun,  etc.,  become  one  with  the  sun  when  the 
surface,  such  as  water  (in  whicli  lie  is  reflected)  is  with- 
drawn and  as  the  akas  witliin  the  pot,  etc.,  becomes 
one  with  tlie  akas  when  tlie  pot,  etc.,  is  withdrawn. 
W  ^^:  ^^T^Rl:  ^5^s^  ir^?5f^  ^rq^  r^fT?T  I 

Just  as  rivers  flowing-  become  lost  in  an  ocean,  gi\in(]^ 
up  both  their  name  and  form,  just  so,  the  knower,  freed 
from  name  and  form,  attains  the  bright  Piiritsha  wliicli 
is  beyond  the  avyakta.  (18) 

Gomi. — Moreover,  just  as  flowing  streams  such  as  the 
Granges  and  tlie  rest  having  reached  the  sea  give  up 
their  distinct  individuality  in  it,  losing  both  their  names 
and  form,  so,  the  knower  being  freed  from  name  and 
form,  created  by  ignorance,  reaches  the  resplendent 
puntsha  above  defined,  who  is  beyond  the  av^yakta  al- 
ready explained. 

cT»^  ajt  cTT^  TT^JTPt  5f TJTT^^T^  f^gffrtSJjm  J?^%  IM  Ml 

He  who  knows  that  liighest  Brahiiiaii  becomes  even 
Brahman ;  and  in  his  line,  none  who  knows  not  the 
BrahTnan  will  be  bom.     He  crosses   grief  and    \irtue 


WITH  SRI  SANKARA'S  COMMENTARY.  177 

and  vice  and  being  freed  from  the  knot    of  the    heart, 
becomes  immortal.  (19) 

Com. — It  may  be  said  that  numerous  obstacles  are 
well  known  to  exist  in  the  attainment  of  good  and 
that  e\'en  the  knower  of  Brahtnan  may,  therefore,  be 
im[)eded  either  by  some  grief  or  other,  or  be  made  to 
take  some  other  couise  by  some  other  being,  such  as 
the  Devas,  reach  some  other  after  death  and  not  reach 
Brahman.  This  cannot  be  ;  for  all  obstacles  have 
already  been  removed  by  knowledge.  Emancipation 
knows  only  the  obstacle  of  ignorance  and  no  other 
obstacle  ;  because  it  is  eternal  and  is  being  the  Atman 
itself.  Therefore,  he  in  the  world  who  knows  that 
highest  Brahman,  as  "  I  am  directly  that"  does  not 
t}ike  any  other  course.  It  is  imj)ossible  even  for  the 
Devas  to  throw  any  obstacle  in  his  attempt  to  reach  the 
Brahimm,  because  he  becomes  the  At7)ian  of  all  these; 
therefore  he  who  knows  the  Brahman  becomes  even 
Brahman.  Moreover  in  the  line  of  this  knower,  there 
will  not  be  born  any  who  knows  not  the  Brahman  ; 
again,  he  overcomes  even  during  life  the  heart-burning 
caused  by  frustration  of  his  many  desires,  crosses  over 
kaiinia  known  as  vice  and  virtue,  and  being  freed  from 

12 


178  MUNDAKOPAMSHAD. 

"  the  knots  of  the  heart "  caused  by  ionorance,  becomes 
immortal.  It  has  ah-eady  been  said  "  the  knot  of  the 
heart  is  untied,  etc" 

This  is  explained  by  the  ■niatdra  "  who  perform  the 
kaviYia  enjoined,  who  are  srotrit/ds,  who  are  centred  in 
the  Brdhnian  (lower)  and  who  witli  faith,  offer  obla- 
tions themselves  to  tlie  tire  named  E/ccirshi,  perform  the 
vow  named  Sirovrata  (who  duly  carry  a  fire  on  the 
head) ;  to  those  alone,  let  one  teacli  tliis  kno\vl<^di>e  of 
the    Brahman^  (20) 

Ccmi. — Now,  the  Upanishad  concludes  by  indicating; 
the  rule  re^ardin^^  the  teachinn'  of  the  knowledoe  of 
Bvdhrnan.  This,  the  rule  aliout  the  teachino'  of  the 
knowledge  oi' Brahman  is  ex])ounded  by  this  text.  Who 
perform  the /iXM'riWt  enjoined,  who  are  Srotriyas,  who 
being  engaged  in  the  worshij)  of  the  manifested  Brah- 
'nian  seek  to  know  the  unmanifested  Braki)tau.  Who 
with  faith,  themselves    offer    the    ol)lations    to  the  fire 


WITH  SKI  sankaha's  commkntary.  179 

known  as  Ekarald  ;  to  them  alone  whose  mind  is  thus 
])urified  and  who  are,  therefore,  fit  (to  receive  instruc- 
tion) should  one  teach  the  knowledi>;e  of  Brahiiutn  as 
also  to  those  by  whom  is  duly  jiractised  the  vow  of 
Sivovratam,  sucli  heiny;  the  well  known  Vedic  vow 
amons"-  those  who  are  of  the  Atkdrvmui  VecUi. 


<^     r     -~ 


JTiT:  ^T^^^'i^  ^^■.  ^T^^f^■iJl\  \\  \-\  \\ 

This  external  pitntskd  di<l  the  seer  Anrjiras  teach  in 
ancient  times ;  none  by  whom  the  vow  is  not  observed 
studies  this ;  ])rostration  to  the  <jreat  sajjes,  ]»rostration 
to  the  j^reat  sa<;es.  (21) 

Com. — Tliis  undecayin*j;  and  trneparitsha  did  the  seer, 
known  as  Aiujiras,  teach  in  ancient  days  to  Smmnka 
who  had  duly  aprroached  him  and  questioned  him 
(about  this).  The  meaninj^  is  that,  similarl}',  any  other 
also  should  teach  the  same  to  one  who  lon<js  for  bliss 
and  seeks  emancipation  and  who  with  that  end  in  view 
has  duly  a])proached  the  jnecejitor.  This  knowledge  in 
the  form  of  k  book,  no  one  who  has  not  observed  the 
vow,  studies ;  for  it  is  knowledj>e,  only  in  those  who 
observe    the    vow,    that    bears    fruit.      Thus   ends   the 


180  MUNDAKOPAMSHAD. 

knowledge  of  Brahimm  which  1ms  been  handed  down 
from  Brahma  and  the  rest  from  ijrecejitor  to  disciple. 
Prostration  to  those  sages,  Brahma  and  the  rest,  who 
have  directly  seen  the  BraJinian  and  realised  him. 
Prostration  again  to  them  ;  the  repetition  is  both  to 
indicate  great  solicitude  and  the  fact  that  the  Muiixla- 
kopanishad  here  ends. 


Here  ends  the  Second  Part  of 
the  Third  :Nhmdaka. 


U    -